TI TMS320DM357

TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
1 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
1.1 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-Performance Digital Media SoC
– 270-MHz ARM926EJ-S™ Core
– Fully Software-Compatible With ARM9™
ARM926EJ-S Core
– Support for 32-Bit and 16-Bit (Thumb®
Mode) Instruction Sets
– ARM® Jazelle® Technology
– EmbeddedICE-RT™ Logic for Real-Time
Debug
ARM9 Memory Architecture
– 16K-Byte Instruction Cache
– 8K-Byte Data Cache
– 16K-Byte RAM
– 8K-Byte ROM
H.264/MPEG4/JPEG Coprocessor
– Fixed Function Coprocessor Supports:
• H.264 BP Codec at D1, VGA, SIF
• MPEG4 SP Codec at D1, VGA, SIF
• JPEG Codec
Embedded Trace Buffer™ (ETB11™) With 4KB
Memory for ARM9 Debug
Endianness: Little Endian
Video Processing Subsystem
– Front End Provides:
• CCD and CMOS Imager Interface
• BT.601/BT.656 Digital YCbCr 4:2:2
(8-/16-Bit) Interface
• Preview Engine for Real-Time Image
Processing
• Glueless Interface to Common Video
Decoders
• Histogram Module
• Auto-Exposure, Auto-White Balance and
Auto-Focus Module
• Resize Engine
– Resize Images From 1/4x to 4x
– Separate Horizontal/Vertical Control
– Back End Provides:
• Hardware On-Screen Display (OSD)
• 3 - 54-MHz DACs for a Combination of:
– Composite NTSC/PAL Video
– Luma/Chroma Separate Video
(S-video)
– Component (YPbPr or RGB) Video
(Progressive/Interlaced)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– Digital Output
– 8-/16-bit YUV or up to 24-Bit RGB
– Up to 2 Video Windows
External Memory Interfaces (EMIFs)
– 32-Bit DDR2 SDRAM Memory Controller
With 256M-Byte Address Space (1.8-V I/O)
– Asynchronous 16-Bit Wide EMIF (EMIFA)
With 128M-Byte Address Reach
• Flash Memory Interfaces
– NOR (8-/16-Bit-Wide Data)
– NAND (8-/16-Bit-Wide Data)
Flash Card Interfaces
– Multimedia Card (MMC)/Secure Digital (SD)
with Secure Data I/O (SDIO)
– SmartMedia
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (64 Independent Channels)
Two 64-Bit General-Purpose Timers (Each
Configurable as Two 32-Bit Timers)
One 64-Bit Watch Dog Timer
Three UARTs (One with RTS and CTS Flow
Control)
One Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) With Two
Chip-Selects
Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C
Bus™)
Audio Serial Port (ASP)
– I2S
– AC97 Audio Codec Interface
– Standard Voice Codec Interface (AIC12)
10/100 Mb/s Ethernet Media Access Controller
(EMAC)
– IEEE 802.3 Compliant
– Media Independent Interface (MII)
Host Port Interface (HPI) with 16-Bit
Multiplexed Address/Data
USB2.0 OTG Controller With Integrated
High-Speed 2.0 PHY
Three Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Outputs
On-Chip ARM ROM Bootloader (RBL) to Boot
From NAND Flash or UART
Comprehensive Power-Saving Modes
Flexible PLL Clock Generators
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this document.
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date.
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not
necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Copyright © 2008, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
•
•
•
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG) BoundaryScan-Compatible
Up to 71 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
(Multiplexed With Other Device Functions)
361-Pin Pb-Free BGA Package
(ZWT Suffix), 0.8-mm Ball Pitch
www.ti.com
•
•
•
0.09-µm/6-Level Cu Metal Process (CMOS)
3.3-V and 1.8-V I/O, 1.2-V Core
Applications:
– Digital Media
– Networked Media Encode/Decode
– Video Imaging
1.2 Description
The TMS320DM357 (also referenced as DM357) leverages TI’s DaVinci™ technology to meet the
networked media encode and decode application processing needs of next-generation embedded devices.
The DM357 enables OEMs and ODMs to quickly bring to market devices featuring robust operating
systems support, rich user interfaces, high processing performance, and long battery life through the
maximum flexibility of a fully integrated mixed processor solution.
The ARM926EJ-S is a 32-bit RISC processor core that performs 32-bit or 16-bit instructions and
processes 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit data. The core uses pipelining so that all parts of the processor and
memory system can operate continuously.
The ARM core incorporates:
• A coprocessor 15 (CP15) and protection module
• Data and program Memory Management Units (MMUs) with table look-aside buffers.
• Separate 16K-byte instruction and 8K-byte data caches. Both are four-way associative with virtual
index virtual tag (VIVT).
The DM357 performance is enhanced by its H.264/MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor (HMJCP). The HMJCP
performs the computational operations required for image processing; JPEG compression and MPEG4
video and imaging standard. The H.264/MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor supports MPEG4 Simple Profile (SP) ,
D1, VGA, SIF encode/decode resolutions and JPEG encode/decode.
The peripheral set includes: 2 configurable video ports (one input port and one output port); a 10/100 Mb/s
Ethernet MAC (EMAC) with a Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) module; an inter-integrated circuit
(I2C) Bus interface; one audio serial port (ASP); 2 64-bit general-purpose timers each configurable as 2
independent 32-bit timers; 1 64-bit watchdog timer; up to 71-pins of general-purpose input/output (GPIO)
with programmable interrupt/event generation modes, multiplexed with other peripherals; 3 UARTs with
hardware handshaking support on 1 UART; 3 pulse width modulator (PWM) peripherals; and 2 external
memory interfaces: an asynchronous external memory interface (EMIFA) for slower memories/peripherals,
and a higher speed synchronous memory interface for DDR2.
The DM357 device includes a Video Processing Subsystem (VPSS) with two configurable video/imaging
peripherals: 1 Video Processing Front-End (VPFE) input used for video capture, and 1 Video Processing
Back-End (VPBE) output for displaying video images.
The Video Processing Front-End (VPFE) is comprised of a CCD Controller (CCDC), a Preview Engine
(Previewer), Histogram Module, Auto-Exposure/White Balance/Focus Module (H3A), and Resizer. The
CCDC is capable of interfacing to common video decoders, CMOS sensors, and Charge Coupled Devices
(CCDs). The Previewer is a real-time image processing engine that takes raw imager data from a CMOS
sensor or CCD and converts from an RGB Bayer Pattern to YUV4:2:2. The Histogram and H3A modules
provide statistical information on the raw color data for use by the DM357. The Resizer accepts image
data for separate horizontal and vertical resizing from 1/4x to 4x in increments of 256/N, where N is
between 64 and 1024.
2
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
The Video Processing Back-End (VPBE) is comprised of an On-Screen Display Engine (OSD) and a
Video Encoder (VENC). The OSD engine is capable of handling 2 separate video windows and 2 separate
OSD windows. Other configurations include 2 video windows, 1 OSD window, and 1 attribute window
allowing up to 8 levels of alpha blending. The VENC provides three analog DACs that run at 54 MHz,
providing a means for composite NTSC/PAL video, S-Video, and/or Component video output. The VENC
also provides up to 24 bits of digital output to interface to RGB888 devices or hi-speed triple DACs such
as the THS8200. The digital output is capable of 8/16-bit BT.656 output and/or CCIR.601 with separate
horizontal and vertical syncs.
The Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) provides an efficient interface between the DM357 and the
network. The DM357 EMAC support both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX, or 10 Mbits/second (Mbps) and 100
Mbps in either half- or full-duplex mode, with hardware flow control and quality of service (QOS) support.
The Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in order to
enumerate all PHY devices in the system. Once a Ethernet PHY candidate has been selected by the
ARM, the MDIO module transparently monitors its link state by reading the PHY status register. Link
change events are stored in the MDIO module and can optionally interrupt the ARM, allowing the ARM to
poll the link status of the device without continuously performing costly MDIO accesses.
The HPI, I2C, SPI, and USB2.0 OTG ports allow DM357 to easily control peripheral devices and/or
communicate with host processors. The DM357 also provides multimedia card support, MMC/SD, with
SDIO support.
The rich peripheral set provides the ability to control external peripheral devices and communicate with
external processors. For details on each of the peripherals, see the related sections later in this document
and the associated peripheral reference guides.
The DM357 has a complete set of development tools for the ARM926EJS. These include C compilers and
a Windows™ debugger interface for visibility into source code execution.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
3
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
1.3 Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the device.
BT.656,
Y/C,
Raw (Bayer)
JTAG Interface
System Control
Input
Clock(s)
PLLs/Clock
Generator
Power/Sleep
Controller
8b BT.656,
Y/C,
24b RGB
Front End
Back End
Resizer
CCD
Controller Histogram/
Video
3A
Interface
Preview
On-Screen Video
Display Encoder 10b DAC
(VENC)
(OSD)
10b DAC
ARM926EJ-S CPU
H.264 BP
16 KB
I-Cache
8 KB
D-Cache
MPEG4 SP
JPEG
16 KB RAM
Pin
Multiplexing
Video Processing Subsystem (VPSS)
HMJCP
Coprocessor
ARM Subsystem
10b DAC
8 KB ROM
NTSC/
PAL,
S-Video,
RGB,
YPbPr
Switched Central Resource (SCR)
Peripherals
Serial Interfaces
EDMA
Audio
Serial
Port
2
I C
SPI
EMAC
With
MDIO
UART
GeneralPurpose
Timer
Watchdog
Timer
PWM
Program/Data Storage
Connectivity
USB 2.0
PHY
System
HPI
DDR2
Mem Ctlr
(32b)
Async EMIF/
NAND/
SmartMedia
Figure 1-1. TMS320DM357 Functional Block Diagram
4
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Contents
1
2
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC) ............ 1
6.1
6.2
Parameter Information .............................. 76
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition
Behavior ............................................. 77
Functional Block Diagram ............................ 4
6.3
Power Supplies ...................................... 77
Device Overview ......................................... 6
6.4
Reset ................................................ 86
2.1
Device Characteristics ................................ 6
6.5
External Clock Input From MXI/CLKIN Pin.......... 89
2.2
Device Compatibility .................................. 7
6.6
Clock PLLs .......................................... 91
ARM Subsystem ...................................... 7
6.7
Interrupts ............................................ 99
HMJCP Coprocessor ................................ 11
6.8
6.9
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)............. 102
Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA)
Controller ........................................... 105
6.10
External Memory Interface (EMIF) ................. 117
6.11
MMC/SD/SDIO ..................................... 125
6.12
Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) Overview . 128
6.13
Host-Port Interface (HPI)........................... 151
6.14
6.15
USB 2.0 ............................................ 154
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART) ............................................. 163
56
6.16
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) ................... 166
60
6.17
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ....................... 170
71
6.18
Audio Serial Port (ASP) ............................ 174
72
6.19
Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) ........ 178
73
6.20
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) ........... 185
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case
Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) .......................... 73
6.21
Timer ............................................... 187
6.22
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)..................... 189
Recommended Operating Conditions ............... 74
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Case
Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ............ 75
6.23
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
1.1
Features .............................................. 1
1.2
Description ............................................ 2
1.3
2.3
2.4
3
4
5
.............................
....................................
2.7
Terminal Functions ..................................
2.8
Device Support ......................................
Device Configurations.................................
3.1
System Module Registers ...........................
3.2
Power Considerations ...............................
3.3
Bootmode ...........................................
3.4
Configurations at Reset .............................
3.5
Configurations After Reset ..........................
System Interconnect ...................................
4.1
System Interconnect Block Diagram ................
Device Operating Conditions ........................
2.5
Memory Map Summary
11
2.6
Pin Assignments
15
5.1
5.2
5.3
6
19
48
53
53
53
54
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications........... 76
Submit Documentation Feedback
7
................................
191
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable
Information ............................................. 193
7.1
Thermal Data for ZWT ............................. 193
7.1.1 Packaging Information............................. 193
Contents
5
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
2 Device Overview
2.1 Device Characteristics
Table 2-1 provides an overview of the TMS320DM357 SoC. The table shows significant features of the
device, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, ARM9 operating frequency, and the
package type with pin count, etc.
Table 2-1. Characteristics of the Processor
HARDWARE FEATURES
DDR2 Memory Controller
Peripherals
Not all peripherals pins are
available at the same time
(for more detail, see the
Device Configurations
section).
DM357
DDR2 (32-bit bus width)
Asynchronous EMIF (EMIFA)
Asynchronous (8/16-bit bus width) RAM, Flash
(NOR, NAND)
Flash Cards
MMC/SD with secure data input/output (SDIO)
SmartMedia/xD
EDMA
64 independent channels
8 QDMA channels
Timers
2 64-Bit General Purpose (each configurable as 2
separate 32-bit timers)
1 64-Bit Watchdog
UART
3 (one with RTS and CTS flow control)
SPI
1 (supports 2 slave devices)
2
I C
1 (Master/Slave)
Audio Serial Port [ASP]
1
10/100 Ethernet MAC with Management Data
Input/Output
1
HPI
1 (16-bit multiplexed address/data)
General-Purpose Input/Output Port
Up to 71
PWM
3 outputs
1 Input (VPFE)
1 Output (VPBE)
Configurable Video Ports
HS/FS/LS Host
HS/FS Device
USB2.0 OTG
On-Chip Memory
Organization
ARM
• 16KB I-cache
• 8KB D-cache
• 16KB RAM
• 8KB ROM
JTAG BSDL_ID
JTAGID Register
(address location: 0x01C4 0028)
0x1B70 002F (Silicon Revision 2.1)
CPU Frequency
MHz
Cycle Time
ns
Voltage
Core (V)
I/O (V)
PLL Options
CLKIN frequency multiplier
(27 MHz reference)
BGA Package
16 x 16 mm
Process Technology
µm
Product Status (1)
Product Preview (PP),
Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
(1)
6
ARM 270 MHz
ARM 3.70 ns
1.2 V
1.8 V, 3.3 V
x1 (Bypass), x22
361-Pin BGA (ZWT)
0.09 µm
PD
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2.2 Device Compatibility
The ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU is compatible with other ARM9 CPUs from ARM Holdings plc.
2.3 ARM Subsystem
The ARM Subsystem is designed to give the ARM926EJ-S (ARM9) master control of the device. In
general, the ARM is responsible for configuration and control of the device; including the Video and Image
Coprocessor (HMJCP), the VPSS Subsystem, and a majority of the peripherals and external memories.
The ARM Subsystem includes the following features:
• ARM926EJ-S RISC processor
• ARMv5TEJ (32/16-bit) instruction set
• Little endian
• Co-Processor 15 (CP15)
• MMU
• 16KB Instruction cache
• 8KB Data cache
• Write Buffer
• 16KB Internal RAM (32-bit wide access)
• 8KB Internal ROM (ARM bootloader for non-EMIFA boot options)
• Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)
• ARM Interrupt controller
• PLL Controller
• Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)
• System Module
2.3.1
ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU
The ARM Subsystem integrates the ARM926EJ-S processor. The ARM926EJ-S processor is a member of
ARM9 family of general-purpose microprocessors. This processor is targeted at multi-tasking applications
where full memory management, high performance, low die size, and low power are all important. The
ARM926EJ-S processor supports the 32-bit ARM and 16 bit THUMB instruction sets, enabling the user to
trade off between high performance and high code density. Specifically, the ARM926EJ-S processor
supports the ARMv5TEJ instruction set, which includes features for efficient execution of Java byte codes,
providing Java performance similar to Just in Time (JIT) Java interpreter, but without associated code
overhead.
The ARM926EJ-S processor supports the ARM debug architecture and includes logic to assist in both
hardware and software debug. The ARM926EJ-S processor has a Harvard architecture and provides a
complete high performance subsystem, including:
• ARM926EJ -S integer core
• CP15 system control coprocessor
• Memory Management Unit (MMU)
• Separate instruction and data Caches
• Write buffer
• Separate instruction and data Tightly-Coupled Memories (TCMs) [internal RAM] interfaces
• Separate instruction and data AHB bus interfaces
• Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)
For more complete details on the ARM9, refer to the ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference Manual, available
at http://www.arm.com
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
7
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2.3.2
www.ti.com
CP15
The ARM926EJ-S system control coprocessor (CP15) is used to configure and control instruction and
data caches, Tightly-Coupled Memories (TCMs), Memory Management Unit (MMU), and other ARM
subsystem functions. The CP15 registers are programmed using the MRC and MCR ARM instructions,
when the ARM in a privileged mode such as supervisor or system mode.
2.3.3
MMU
The ARM926EJ-S MMU provides virtual memory features required by operating systems such as Linux®,
Windows® CE, Ultron®, ThreadX®, etc. A single set of two level page tables stored in main memory is
used to control the address translation, permission checks and memory region attributes for both data and
instruction accesses. The MMU uses a single unified Translation Lookaside Buffer (TLB) to cache the
information held in the page tables. The MMU features are:
• Standard ARM architecture v4 and v5 MMU mapping sizes, domains and access protection scheme.
• Mapping sizes are:
– 1MB (sections)
– 64KB (large pages)
– 4KB (small pages)
– 1KB (tiny pages)
• Access permissions for large pages and small pages can be specified separately for each quarter of
the page (subpage permissions)
• Hardware page table walks
• Invalidate entire TLB, using CP15 register 8
• Invalidate TLB entry, selected by MVA, using CP15 register 8
• Lockdown of TLB entries, using CP15 register 10
2.3.4
Caches and Write Buffer
The size of the Instruction Cache is 16KB, Data cache is 8KB. Additionally, the Caches have the following
features:
• Virtual index, virtual tag, and addressed using the Modified Virtual Address (MVA)
• Four-way set associative, with a cache line length of eight words per line (32-bytes per line) and with
two dirty bits in the Dcache
• Dcache supports write-through and write-back (or copy back) cache operation, selected by memory
region using the C and B bits in the MMU translation tables.
• Critical-word first cache refilling
• Cache lockdown registers enable control over which cache ways are used for allocation on a line fill,
providing a mechanism for both lockdown, and controlling cache corruption
• Dcache stores the Physical Address TAG (PA TAG) corresponding to each Dcache entry in the TAG
RAM for use during the cache line write-backs, in addition to the Virtual Address TAG stored in the
TAG RAM. This means that the MMU is not involved in Dcache write-back operations, removing the
possibility of TLB misses related to the write-back address.
• Cache maintenance operations provide efficient invalidation of, the entire Dcache or Icache, regions of
the Dcache or Icache, and regions of virtual memory.
The write buffer is used for all writes to a noncachable bufferable region, write-through region and write
misses to a write-back region. A separate buffer is incorporated in the Dcache for holding write-back for
cache line evictions or cleaning of dirty cache lines. The main write buffer has 16-word data buffer and a
four-address buffer. The Dcache write-back has eight data word entries and a single address entry.
8
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
2.3.5
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Tightly Coupled Memory (TCM)
ARM internal RAM is provided for storing real-time and performance-critical code/data and the Interrupt
Vector table. ARM internal ROM enables non-EMIFA boot options, such as NAND and UART. The RAM
and ROM memories interfaced to the ARM926EJ-S via the tightly coupled memory interface that provides
for separate instruction and data bus connections. Since the ARM TCM does not allow instructions on the
D-TCM bus or data on the I-TCM bus, an arbiter is included so that both data and instructions can be
stored in the internal RAM/ROM. The arbiter also allows accesses to the RAM/ROM from extra-ARM
sources (e.g., EDMA or other masters). The ARM926EJ-S has built-in DMA support for direct accesses to
the ARM internal memory from a non-ARM master. Because of the time-critical nature of the TCM link to
the ARM internal memory, all accesses from non-ARM devices are treated as DMA transfers.
Instruction and Data accesses are differentiated via accessing different memory map regions, with the
instruction region from 0x0000 through 0x7FFF and data from 0x8000 through 0xFFFF. The instruction
region at 0x0000 and data region at 0x8000 map to the same physical 16KB TCM RAM. Placing the
instruction region at 0x0000 is necessary to allow the ARM Interrupt Vector table to be placed at 0x0000,
as required by the ARM architecture. The internal 16-KB RAM is split into two physical banks of 8KB
each, which allows simultaneous instruction and data accesses to be accomplished if the code and data
are in separate banks.
2.3.6
Advanced High-Performance Bus (AHB)
The ARM Subsystem uses the AHB port of the ARM926EJ-S to connect the ARM to the Config bus and
the external memories. Arbiters are employed to arbitrate access to the separate D-AHB and I-AHB by the
Config Bus and the external memories bus.
2.3.7
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB)
To support real-time trace, the ARM926EJ-S processor provides an interface to enable connection of an
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM). The ARM926ES-J Subsystem in the DM357 also includes the
Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB). The ETM consists of two parts:
• Trace Port provides real-time trace capability for the ARM9.
• Triggering facilities provide trigger resources, which include address and data comparators, counter,
and sequencers.
The DM357 trace port is not pinned out and is instead only connected to the Embedded Trace Buffer. The
ETB has a 4KB buffer memory. ETB enabled debug tools are required to read/interpret the captured trace
data.
2.3.8
ARM Memory Mapping
The ARM memory map is shown in Section 2.5, Memory Map Summary of this document. The ARM has
access to memories shown in the following sections.
2.3.8.1 ARM Internal Memories
The ARM has access to the following ARM internal memories:
• 16KB ARM Internal RAM on TCM interface, logically separated into two 8KB pages to allow
simultaneous access on any given cycle if there are separate accesses for code (I-TCM bus) and data
(D-TCM) to the different memory regions.
• 8KB ARM Internal ROM
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
9
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
2.3.8.2 External Memories
The ARM has access to the following external memories:
• DDR2 Synchronous DRAM
• Asynchronous EMIF / NOR Flash / NAND Flash
• Flash card devices:
– MMC/SD with SDIO
– xD
– SmartMedia
2.3.9
Peripherals
The ARM9 has access to all of the peripherals on the DM357 device.
2.3.10 PLL Controller (PLLC)
The ARM Subsystem includes the PLL Controller. The PLL Controller contains a set of registers for
configuring DM357’s two internal PLLs (PLL1 and PLL2). The PLL Controller provides the following
configuration and control:
• PLL Bypass Mode
• Set PLL multiplier parameters
• Set PLL divider parameters
• PLL power down
• Oscillator power down
The PLLs are briefly described in this document in the Clocking section. For more detailed information on
the PLLs and PLL Controller register descriptions, see Section 2.8.3, Documentation Support, of this
document for the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
2.3.11 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)
The ARM Subsystem includes the Power and Sleep Controller (PSC). Through register settings
accessible by the ARM9, the PSC provides two levels of power savings: peripheral/module clock gating
and power domain shut-off. Brief details on the PSC are given in Section 6.3, Power Supplies. For more
detailed information and complete register descriptions for the PSC, see Section 2.8.3, Documentation
Support, for the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
2.3.12 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC)
The ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC) accepts device interrupts and maps them to either the ARM’s IRQ
(interrupt request) or FIQ (fast interrupt request). The ARM Interrupt Controller is briefly described in this
document in the Interrupts section. For detailed information on the ARM Interrupt Controller, see
Section 2.8.3, Documentation Support for the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Guide.
2.3.13 System Module
The ARM Subsystem includes the System module. The System module consists of a set of registers for
configuring and controlling a variety of system functions. For details and register descriptions for the
System module, see Section 3, Device Configurations and see Section 2.8.3, Documentation Support, for
the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
10
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2.3.14 Power Management
DM357 has several means of managing power consumption. There is extensive use of clock gating, which
reduces the power used by global device clocks and individual peripheral clocks. Clock management can
be utilized to reduce clock frequencies in order to reduce switching power. For more details on power
management techniques, see Section 3, Device Configurations, Section 6, Peripheral and Electrical
Specifications, and see Section 2.8.3, Documentation Support, for the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem
Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
DM357 gives the programmer full flexibility to use any and all of the previously mentioned capabilities to
customize an optimal power management strategy. Several typical power management scenarios are
described in the following sections.
2.4 HMJCP Coprocessor
The DM357 performance is enhanced by its H.264/MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor (HMJCP). The HMJCP
performs the computational operations required for image processing; JPEG compression and MPEG4
video and imaging standard. The HMJCP includes the following features:
• H.264 BP
• MPEG4 SP
• JPEG
2.5 Memory Map Summary
Table 2-2 shows the memory map address ranges of the device. Table 2-3 depicts the expanded map of
the Configuration Space (0x0180 0000 through 0x0FFF FFFF). The device has multiple on-chip memories
associated with its two processors and various subsystems. To help simplify software development a
unified memory map is used where possible to maintain a consistent view of device resources across all
bus masters.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
11
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-2. Memory Map Summary
START
ADDRESS
END
ADDRESS
SIZE
(Bytes)
0x0000 0000
0x0000 1FFF
8K
ARM RAM0 (Instruction)
0x0000 2000
0x0000 3FFF
8K
ARM RAM1 (Instruction)
0x0000 4000
0x0000 5FFF
8K
ARM ROM (Instruction)
0x0000 6000
0x0000 7FFF
8K
Reserved
0x0000 8000
0x0000 9FFF
8K
0x0000 A000
0x0000 BFFF
8K
0x0000 C000
0x0000 DFFF
8K
0x0000 E000
0x0000 FFFF
8K
0x0001 0000
0x000F FFFF
960K
0x0010 0000
0x001F FFFF
1M
0x0020 0000
0x007F FFFF
6M
0x0080 0000
0x0080 FFFF
64K
0x0081 0000
0x00E0 7FFF
6112K
0x00E0 8000
0x00E0 FFFF
32K
0x00E1 0000
0x00F0 3FFF
976K
0x00F0 4000
0x00F0 FFFF
48K
EDMA/
PERIPHERAL
ARM
HPI
Reserved
Reserved
ARM RAM0 (Data)
ARM RAM0
ARM RAM0
ARM RAM1 (Data)
ARM RAM1
ARM RAM1
ARM ROM (Data)
ARM ROM
ARM ROM
Reserved
Reserved
CFG Bus Peripherals
CFG Bus Peripherals
CFG Bus Peripherals (1)
VPSS
Reserved
0x00F1 0000
0x00F1 7FFF
32K
0x00F1 8000
0x017F FFFF
9120K
0x0180 0000
0x01BB FFFF
3840K
0x01BC 0000
0x01BC 0FFF
4K
ARM ETB Memory
0x01BC 1000
0x01BC 17FF
2K
ARM ETB Registers
0x01BC 1800
0x01BC 18FF
256
ARM IceCrusher
0x01BC 1900
0x01BF FFFF
255744
0x01C0 0000
0x01FF FFFF
4M
Reserved
0x0200 0000
0x09FF FFFF
128M
EMIFA (Code and Data)
EMIFA (Data)
0x0A00 0000
0x0BFF FFFF
32M
Reserved
Reserved
0x0C00 0000
0x0FFF FFFF
64M
Reserved
Reserved
0x1000 0000
0x1000 7FFF
32K
Reserved
0x1000 8000
0x1000 9FFF
8K
ARM RAM0
0x1000 A000
0x1000 BFFF
8K
ARM RAM1
0x1000 C000
0x1000 DFFF
8K
0x1000 E000
0x1000 FFFF
8K
0x1001 0000
0x110F FFFF
17344K
0x1110 0000
0x111F FFFF
1M
0x1120 0000
0x117F FFFF
6M
0x1180 0000
0x1180 FFFF
64K
Reserved
Reserved
0x1181 0000
0x11E0 7FFF
6112K
Reserved
Reserved
0x11E0 8000
0x11E0 FFFF
32K
Reserved
Reserved
0x11E1 0000
0x11F0 3FFF
976K
Reserved
Reserved
0x11F0 4000
0x11F0 FFFF
48K
Reserved
Reserved
0x11F1 0000
0x11F1 7FFF
32K
Reserved
Reserved
0x11F1 8000
0x1FFF FFFF
241M-32K Reserved
Reserved
0x2000 0000
0x2000 7FFF
0x2000 8000
0x41FF FFFF
0x4200 0000
0x4FFF FFFF
224M
Reserved
Reserved
0x5000 0000
0x7FFF FFFF
768M
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ARM ROM
Reserved
Reserved
(1)
12
32K
DDR2 Control Registers
544M-32k Reserved
DDR2 Control Registers
Reserved
DDR2 Control Registers
Reserved
Reserved
0x8000 0000
0x8FFF FFFF
256M
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
DDR2
0x9000 0000
0xFFFF FFFF
1792M
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
HPI's access to the configuration bus peripherals is limited to the power and sleep controller registers, PLL1 and PLL2 registers, and
HPI configuration registers.
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-3. Configuration Memory Map Summary
START
ADDRESS
END
ADDRESS
SIZE
(Bytes)
0x0180 0000
0x0180 FFFF
64K
0x0181 0000
0x0181 0FFF
4K
0x0181 1000
0x0181 1FFF
4K
0x0181 2000
0x0181 2FFF
4K
0x0182 0000
0x0182 FFFF
64K
0x0183 0000
0x0183 FFFF
64K
0x0184 0000
0x0184 FFFF
64K
0x0185 0000
0x0187 FFFF
192K
0x0188 0000
0x01BB FFFF
3328K
0x01BC 0000
0x01BC 00FF
256
ARM/EDMA
Reserved
0x01BC 0100
0x01BC 01FF
256
0x01BC 0200
0x01BC 0FFF
3.5K
ARM ETB Memory
0x01BC 1000
0x01BC 17FF
2K
ARM ETB Registers
0x01BC 1800
0x01BC 18FF
256
ARM Ice Crusher
0x01BC 1900
0x01BF FFFF
255744
Reserved
0x01C0 0000
0x01C0 FFFF
64K
EDMA CC
0x01C1 0000
0x01C1 03FF
1K
EDMA TC0
0x01C1 0400
0x01C1 07FF
1K
EDMA TC1
0x01C1 8800
0x01C1 9FFF
6K
0x01C1 A000
0x01C1 FFFF
24K
0x01C2 0000
0x01C2 03FF
1K
UART0
0x01C2 0400
0x01C2 07FF
1K
UART1
0x01C2 0800
0x01C2 0BFF
1K
UART2
0x01C2 0C00
0x01C2 0FFF
1K
Reserved
0x01C2 1000
0x01C2 13FF
1K
I2C
0x01C2 1400
0x01C2 17FF
1K
Timer0
0x01C2 1800
0x01C2 1BFF
1K
Timer1
0x01C2 1C00
0x01C2 1FFF
1K
Timer2 (Watchdog)
0x01C2 2000
0x01C2 23FF
1K
PWM0
0x01C2 2400
0x01C2 27FF
1K
PWM1
PWM2
Reserved
0x01C2 2800
0x01C2 2BFF
1K
0x01C2 2C00
0x01C3 FFFF
117K
0x01C4 0000
0x01C4 07FF
2K
System Module
Reserved
0x01C4 0800
0x01C4 0BFF
1K
PLL Controller 1
0x01C4 0C00
0x01C4 0FFF
1K
PLL Controller 2
0x01C4 1000
0x01C4 1FFF
4K
Power and Sleep Controller
0x01C4 2000
0x01C4 202F
48
Reserved
DDR2 VTP Reg
0x01C4 2030
0x01C4 2033
4
0x01C4 2034
0x01C4 23FF
1K - 52
0x01C4 2400
0x01C4 7FFF
23K
Reserved
0x01C4 8000
0x01C4 83FF
1K
0x01C4 8400
0x01C5 FFFF
95K
0x01C6 0000
0x01C6 3FFF
16K
0x01C6 4000
0x01C6 5FFF
8K
USB2.0 OTG Registers / RAM
0x01C6 6000
0x01C6 67FF
2K
Reserved
0x01C6 6800
0x01C6 6FFF
2K
SPI
Submit Documentation Feedback
ARM Interrupt Controller
Reserved
Device Overview
13
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
14
Device Overview
www.ti.com
0x01C6 7000
0x01C6 77FF
2K
GPIO
0x01C6 7800
0x01C6 7FFF
2K
HPI
0x01C6 8000
0x01C6 FFFF
32K
Reserved
0x01C7 0000
0x01C7 3FFF
16K
VPSS Registers
0x01C7 4000
0x01C7 FFFF
48K
Reserved
0x01C8 0000
0x01C8 0FFF
4K
EMAC Control Registers
0x01C8 1000
0x01C8 1FFF
4K
EMAC Control Module Registers
0x01C8 2000
0x01C8 3FFF
8K
EMAC Control Module RAM
0x01C8 4000
0x01C8 47FF
2K
MDIO Control Registers
0x01C8 4800
0x01C8 4FFF
2K
0x01C8 5000
0x01CB FFFF
236K
0x01CC 0000
0x01CD FFFF
128K
0x01CE 0000
0x01CF FFFF
128K
0x01D0 0000
0x01DF FFFF
1M
0x01E0 0000
0x01E0 0FFF
4K
EMIFA Control
0x01E0 1000
0x01E0 1FFF
4K
Reserved
0x01E0 2000
0x01E0 3FFF
8K
ASP
0x01E0 4000
0x01E0 FFFF
48K
Reserved
0x01E1 0000
0x01E1 FFFF
64K
MMC/SD/SDIO
0x01E2 0000
0x01E3 FFFF
128K
0x01E4 0000
0x01FF FFFF
1792K
0x0200 0000
0x03FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA Data/Code (CS2)
0x0400 0000
0x05FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA Data/Code (CS3)
0x0600 0000
0x07FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA Data/Code (CS4)
0x0800 0000
0x09FF FFFF
32M
EMIFA Data/Code (CS5)
0x0A00 0000
0x0BFF FFFF
32M
Reserved
0x0C00 0000
0x0FFF FFFF
64M
Reserved
Reserved
HMJCP
Reserved
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2.6 Pin Assignments
Extensive use of pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in
the smallest possible package. Pin multiplexing is controlled using a combination of hardware
configuration at device reset and software programmable register settings. For more information on pin
muxing, see Section 3.5.2, Multiplexed Pin Configurations, of this document.
2.6.1
Pin Map (Bottom View)
Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-4 show the bottom view of the package pin assignments in four quadrants (A,
B, C, and D).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
RSV3
DDR_D[4]
DDR_D[7]
DDR_D[9]
DDR_D[12]
DDR_D[14]
DDR_CLK0
DDR_CLK0
DDR_A[12]
DDR_A[11]
W
V
DDR_D[2]
DDR_D[3]
DDR_D[6]
DDR_D[8]
DDR_D[11]
DDR_D[13]
DDR_D[15]
DDR_CKE
DDR_BS[1]
DDR_A[8]
V
U
DDR_D[0]
DDR_D[1]
DDR_D[5]
DDR_DQS[0]
DDR_D[10]
DDR_DQS[1]
DDR_RAS
DDR_BS[0]
DDR_BS[2]
DDR_A[10]
U
T
EM_CS5/
GPIO8
EM_CS4/
GPIO9
EM_A[21]/
GPIO10
DDR_
DQM[0]
DVDDR2
DDR_
DQM[1]
DDR_CAS
DDR_WE
DDR_CS
DDR_VDDDLL
T
R
EM_A[12]/
GPIO19
EM_A[17]/
GPIO14
EM_A[20]/
GPIO11
EM_A[19]/
GPIO12
EM_A[16]/
GPIO15
VSS
VSS
RSV7
DVDDR2
VSS
R
P
EM_A[10]/
GPIO21
EM_A[11]/
GPIO20
EM_A[15]/
GPIO16
EM_A[14]/
GPIO17
EM_A[18]/
GPIO13
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
P
N
EM_A[6]/
GPIO25
EM_A[7]/
GPIO24
EM_A[8]/
GPIO23
EM_A[13]/
GPIO18
DVDD18
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
N
M
MXO
PLLVDD18
RSV24
EM_A[9]/
GPIO22
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
M
L
MXI/CLKIN
MXVSS
RSV6
RESET
MXVDD
VSS
DVDD18
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
L
K
CLK_OUT0/
GPIO48
EM_A[3]/
GPIO28
EM_A[5]/
GPIO26
EM_A[4]/
GPIO27
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
CVDD
K
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 2-1. Pin Map [Quadrant A]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
15
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
W
DDR_A[6]
DDR_A[5]
DDR_A[0]
DDR_D[16]
DDR_D[18]
DDR_D[21]
DDR_D[27]
DDR_D[29]
RSV4
W
V
DDR_A[7]
DDR_A[4]
DDR_A[2]
DDR_D[17]
DDR_D[19]
DDR_D[22]
DDR_D[24]
DDR_D[28]
DDR_D[30]
V
U
DDR_A[9]
DDR_A[3]
DDR_A[1]
DDR_DQS[2]
DDR_D[20]
DDR_DQS[3]
DDR_D[25]
DDR_D[26]
DDR_D[31]
U
DDR_ZN
DDR_ZP
DDR_DQM[2]
DDR_VREF
DDR_DQM[3]
DDR_D[23]
VSSA_1P1V
RSV45
T
DDR_
T
VSSDLL
R
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
DAC_RBIAS
DAC_VREF
VDDA_1P8V
DAC_IOUT_C
R
P
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
VDDA_1P1V
VSSA_1P8V
DAC_IOUT_B
DAC_IOUT_A
P
N
DVDDR2
VSS
DVDDR2
VSS
CI3/CCD11
CI4/CCD12/
UART_RTS2
CI5/CCD13/
UART_CTS2
CI6/CCD14/
UART_TXD2
CI7/CCD15/
UART_RXD2
N
M
VSS
CVDD
VSS
DVDD18
CI0/CCD8
CI1/CCD9
CI2/CCD10
PCLK
M
L
CVDD
DVDD18
VSS
YI4/CCD4
YI5/CCD5
YI6/CCD6
YI7/CCD7
VD
L
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
YI0/CCD0
YI1/CCD1
YI2/CCD2
K
CVDD
11
VSS
CVDD
12
13
14
15
16
17
HD
18
YI3/CCD3
K
19
Figure 2-2. Pin Map [Quadrant B]
16
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
J
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
VSS
DVDD18
USB_ID
USB_VBUS
USB_
VSSA3P3
USB_
VDDA3P3
J
H
CVDD
CVDD
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
USB_VSS1P8
USB_VDD1P8
USB_R1
USB_DM
H
G
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
DVDD18
USB_
VSSREF
USB_
VSSA1P2LD0
USB_
VDDA1P2LD0
USB_DP
G
F
DVDD33
DVDD33
DVDD33
DVDD18
CVDD
M24VDD
M24VSS
M24XI
M24XO
F
E
GPIOV33_10/
RXD3
GPIO1/
C_WE
GPIO5/G1
YOUT4/R4/
AEAW4
YOUT5/R5
YOUT6/R6
YOUT7/R7
CLK_OUT1/
TIM_IN/
GPIO49
E
GPIO2/G0
GPIO38/R1
YOUT0/G5/
AEAW0
YOUT1/G6/
AEAW1
YOUT2/G7/
AEAW2
YOUT3/R3/
AEAW3
VCLK
D
GPIO0/
LCD_OE
GPIO3/B0/
LCD_FIELD
PWM0/
GPIO45
COUT7/G4
HSYNC
VSYNC
VPBECLK
C
GPIOV33_0/
TXEN
GPIO4/R0/
C_FIELD
PWM1/R2/
GPIO46
COUT1/B4/
BTSEL1
COUT3/B6
COUT5/G2
COUT6/G3
B
GPIOV33_1/
TXCLK
GPIO6/B1
PWM2/
B2/GPIO47
COUT0/B3/
BTSEL0
COUT2/B5/
EM_WIDTH
COUT4/B7
RSV2
A
D
GPIOV33_12/
RXDV
C
GPIOV33_8/
RXD1
B
GPIOV33_9/
RXD2
A
GPIOV33_5/
TXD2
11
GPIOV33_7/
RXD0
GPIOV33_4/
TXD1
GPIOV33_6/
TXD3
GPIOV33_3/
TXD0
GPIOV33_2/
COL
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 2-3. Pin Map [Quadrant C]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
17
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
1
2
www.ti.com
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J
EM_A[2]/
(CLE)/
HCNTL0
EM_A[1]/
(ALE)/
HHWIL
EM_BA[0]/
HINT
EM_A[0]/
HCNTL1/
GPIO53
GPIO50
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
CVDD
CVDD
H
GPIO51
EM_BA[1]/
GPIO52
UART_TXD1
EM_OE/(RE)/
HDS1
EM_D14/
HD14
DVDD18
VSS
CVDD
VSS
CVDD
H
G
UART_RXD1
EM_WE/(WE)/
HDS2
EM_R/W/
HR/W
EM_D11/
HD11
EM_D10/
HD10
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
G
F
EM_WAIT/
(RDY/BSY)/
HRDY
EM_D13/
HD13
EM_D8/
HD8
EM_D6/
HD6
EM_D2/
HD2
DVDD18
VSS
DVDD18
VSS
DVDD33
F
E
EM_D15/
HD15
EM_D9/
HD9
EM_D3/
HD3
EM_D4/
HD4
EM_D0/
HD0
TMS
DVDD18
VSS
SD_DATA1
GPIOV33_15/
MDIO
E
D
EM_D12/
HD12
EM_D5/
HD5
EM_D1/
HD1
RSV5
UART_RXD0/
GPIO35
EMU0
TRST
SD_DATA0
SD_DATA2
GPIOV33_13/
RXER
D
C
EM_D7/
HD7
EM_CS2/
HCS
GPIO7
SCL/
GPIO43
UART_TXD0/
GPIO36
EMU1
FSR/
GPIO32
FSX/
GPIO31
SD_DATA3
GPIOV33_14/
CRS
C
B
EM_CS3
SPI_EN1/
GPIO42
SPI_DI/
GPIO40
SDA/GPIO44
TDO
RTCK
DX/
GPIO33
CLKX/
GPIO29
SD_CMD
GPIOV33_16/
MDCLK
B
A
RSV1
SPI_DO/
GPIO41
SPI_CLK/
GPIO39
SPI_EN0/
GPIO37
TDI
TCK
DR/
GPIO34
CLKR/
GPIO30
SD_CLK
GPIOV33_11/
RXCLK
A
5
6
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
J
10
Figure 2-4. Pin Map [Quadrant D]
18
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2.7 Terminal Functions
The terminal functions tables (Table 2-4 through Table 2-27) identify the external signal names, the
associated pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type, whether the pin
has any internal pullup or pulldown resistors, and a functional pin description. For more detailed
information on device configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pin, and see the Device
Configurations section of this data manual.
Table 2-4. BOOT Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
BOOT
COUT0/
B3/
BTSEL0
COUT1/
B4/
BTSEL1
COUT2/
B5/
EM_WIDTH
(1)
(2)
(3)
A16
B16
A17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
IPD
DVDD18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
These pins are multiplexed between ARM boot mode and
the VPBE. At reset, the boot mode inputs BTSEL0 and
BTSEL1 are sampled to determine the ARM boot
configuration. See below for the boot modes set by these
inputs. See the Bootmode section for more details.
After reset, these are video encoder outputs COUT0 and
COUT1, or RGB666/888 Blue output data bits 3 and 4
B3/B4.
BTSEL1
BTSEL0
ARM Boot Mode
0
0
ARM ROM Boot (NAND) [default]
0
1
ARM EMIFA Boot (NOR)
1
0
ARM ROM Boot (HPI)
1
1
ARM ROM Boot (UART0)
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and the VPBE. At
reset, the input state is sampled to set the EMIFA data
bus width (EM_WIDTH). For an 8-bit wide EMIFA data
bus, EM_WIDTH = 0. For a 16-bit wide EMIFA data bus,
EM_WIDTH = 1.
After reset, it is video encoder output COUT2 or
RGB666/888 Blue output data bit 5 B5.
For proper device operation, at reset this pin must be
externally pulled down via a 10-kΩ resistor.
COUT3/
B6
B17
YOUT0/
G5/
AEAW0
D15
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT1/
G6/
AEAW1
D16
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
These pins are multiplexed between EMIFA and the
VPBE. At reset, the input states of AEAW[4:0] are
sampled to set the EMIFA address bus width. See the
Peripheral Selection at Device Reset section for details.
YOUT2/
G7/
AEAW2
D17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
After reset, these are video encoder outputs YOUT[0:4]
or RGB666/888 Red and Green data bit outputs G5, G6,
G7, R3, and R4.
YOUT3/
R3/
AEAW3
D18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT4/
R4/
AEAW4
E15
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
After reset, it is video encoder output COUT3 or
RGB666/888 Blue data bit 6 output B6.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
19
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-5. Oscillator/PLL Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
OSCILLATOR, PLL
(1)
(2)
(3)
MXI/CLKIN
L1
I
DVDD18
Crystal input MXI for MX oscillator (system oscillator, typically 27 MHz). If a crystal
input is not used, but instead a physical clock-in source is supplied, this is the
external oscillator clock input.
MXO
M1
O
DVDD18
Crystal output for MX oscillator. If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical
clock-in source is supplied, MXO should be left as a No Connect.
MXVDD
L5
S
(3)
MXVSS
L2
GND
(3)
M24XI
F18
I
DVDD18
Crystal input for M24 oscillator (24 MHz for USB). If a crystal input is not used, but
instead a physical clock-in source is supplied, this is the external oscillator clock
input. When the USB peripheral is not used, M24XI should be left as a No Connect.
M24XO
F19
O
DVDD18
Crystal output for M24 oscillator. If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical
clock-in source is supplied, M24XO should be left as a No Connect. When the USB
peripheral is not used, M24XO should be left as a No Connect.
1.8-V power supply for M24 oscillator. If a crystal input is not used, but instead a
physical clock-in source is supplied, M24VDD should still be connected to the 1.8-V
power supply. When the USB peripheral is not used, M24VDD should be connected
to the 1.8-V power supply.
M24VDD
F16
S
(3)
M24VSS
F17
GND
(3)
PLLVDD18
M2
S
(3)
1.8-V power supply for MX oscillator. If a crystal input is not used, but instead a
physical clock-in source is supplied, MXVDD should still be connected to the 1.8-V
power supply.
Ground for MX oscillator. If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical
clock-in source is supplied, MXVSS should still be connected to ground.
Ground for M24 oscillator. If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical
clock-in source is supplied, M24VSS should still be connected to ground. When the
USB peripheral is not used, M24VSS should be connected to ground.
1.8-V power supply for PLLs (system).
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
For more information, see the Recommended Operating Conditions table
Table 2-6. Clock Generator Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
CLOCK GENERATOR
(1)
(2)
20
CLK_OUT0/
GPIO48
K1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the PLL1 clock generator and GPIO.
For the PLL1 clock generator, it is clock output CLK_OUT0. This is configurable for
13.5 MHz or 27 MHz clock outputs.
CLK_OUT1/
TIM_IN/
GPIO49
E19
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the USB clock generator, timer, and GPIO.
For the USB clock generator, it is clock output CLK_OUT1. This is configurable for
12 MHz or 24 MHz clock outputs.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-7. RESET and JTAG Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
I
IPU
DVDD18
DESCRIPTION
RESET
RESET
L4
This is the active low global reset input.
JTAG
(1)
(2)
(3)
TMS
E6
I
IPU
DVDD18
JTAG test-port mode select input
TDO
B5
O/Z
–
DVDD18
JTAG test-port data output
TDI
A5
I
IPU
DVDD18
JTAG test-port data input
TCK
A6
I
IPU
DVDD18
JTAG test-port clock input
RTCK
B6
O/Z
–
DVDD18
JTAG test-port return clock output
TRST
D7
I
IPD
DVDD18
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG compatibility statement portion of this data manual .
EMU1
C6
I/O/Z
IPU
DVDD18
Emulation pin 1
EMU0
D6
I/O/Z
IPU
DVDD18
Emulation pin 0
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
21
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-8. EMIFA Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA BOOT CONFIGURATION
COUT2/
B5/
EM_WIDTH
A17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT0/
G5/
AEAW0
D15
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT1/
G6/
AEAW1
D16
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT2/
G7/
AEAW2
D17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT3/
R3/
AEAW3
D18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT4/
R4/
AEAW4
E15
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and the VPBE. At reset, the input state is
sampled to set the EMIFA data bus width (EM_WIDTH). For an 8-bit wide EMIFA
data bus, EM_WIDTH = 0. For a 16-bit wide EMIFA data bus, EM_WIDTH = 1.
After reset, it is video encoder output COUT2 or RGB666/888 Blue output data bit 5
B5.
These pins are multiplexed between EMIFA and the VPBE. At reset, the input states
of AEAW[4:0] are sampled to set the EMIFA address bus width. See the Peripheral
Selection at Device Reset section for details.
After reset, these are video encoder outputs YOUT[0:4] or RGB666/888 Red and
Green data bit outputs G5, G6, G7, R3, and R4.
EMIFA FUNCTIONAL PINS: ASYNC / NOR
EM_CS2/
HCS
C2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For EMIFA, this pin is Chip Select 2 output EM_CS2 for use with asynchronous
memories (i.e., NOR flash) or NAND flash. This is the chip select for the default boot
and ROM boot modes.
EM_CS3
B1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
For EMIFA, this pin is Chip Select 3 output EM_CS3 for use with asynchronous
memories (i.e., NOR flash) or NAND flash.
EM_CS4/
GPIO9
T2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is Chip Select 4 output EM_CS4 for use with asynchronous memories
(i.e., NOR flash) or NAND flash.
EM_CS5/
GPIO8
T1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is Chip Select 5 output EM_CS5 for use with asynchronous memories
(i.e., NOR flash) or NAND flash.
EM_R/W/
HR/W
G3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For EMIFA, it is read/write output EM_R/W.
EM_WAIT/
(RDY/BSY)
HRDY
F1
I/O/Z
IPU
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For EMIFA, it is wait state extension input EM_WAIT.
EM_OE/
(RE)
HDS1
H4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For EMIFA, it is output enable output EM_OE.
EM_WE
(WE)/
HDS2
G2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For NAND/SmartMedia/xD or EMIFA, it is write enable output EM_WE.
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For EMIFA, this is the Bank Address 0 output (EM_BA[0]).
When connected to an 8-bit asynchronous memory, this pin is the lowest order bit of
the byte address.
When connected to a 16-bit asynchronous memory, this pin has the same function
as EMIF address pin 22 (EM_A[22]).
EM_BA[0]/
HINT
(1)
(2)
(3)
22
J3
I/O/Z
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-8. EMIFA Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
EM_BA[1]/
GPIO52
H2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, this is the Bank Address 1 output EM_BA[1].
When connected to a 16 bit asynchronous memory this pin is the lowest order bit of
the 16-bit word address.
When connected to an 8-bit asynchronous memory, this pin is the 2nd bit of the
address.
EM_A[21]/
GPIO10
T3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 21 output EM_A[21].
EM_A[20]/
GPIO11
R3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 20 output EM_A[20].
EM_A[19]/
GPIO12
R4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 19 output EM_A[19].
EM_A[18]/
GPIO13
P5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 18 output EM_A[18].
EM_A[17]/
GPIO14
R2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 17 output EM_A[17].
EM_A[16]/
GPIO15
R5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 16 output EM_A[16].
EM_A[15]/
GPIO16
P3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 15 output EM_A[15].
EM_A[14]/
GPIO17
P4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 14 output EM_A[14].
EM_A[13]/
GPIO18
N4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 13 output EM_A[13].
EM_A[12]/
GPIO19
R1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 12 output EM_A[12].
EM_A[11]/
GPIO20
P2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 11 output EM_A[11].
EM_A[10]/
GPIO21
P1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 10 output EM_A[10].
EM_A[9]/
GPIO22
M4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 9 output EM_A[9].
EM_A[8]/
GPIO23
N3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 8 output EM_A[8].
EM_A[7]/
GPIO24
N2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 7 output EM_A[7].
EM_A[6]/
GPIO25
N1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 6 output EM_A[6].
EM_A[5]/
GPIO26
K3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 5 output EM_A[5].
EM_A[4]/
GPIO27
K4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 4 output EM_A[4].
EM_A[3]/
GPIO28
K2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO.
For EMIFA, it is address bit 3 output EM_A[3].
EM_A[2]/
(CLE)/
HCNTL0
J1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For EMIFA, this pin is the EM_A[2] address line.
EM_A[1]/
(ALE)/
HHWIL
J2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia.xD) and HPI.
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA, HPI, and GPIO.
For EMIFA, this is Address output EM_A[0], which is the least significant bit on a
32-bit word address.
When connected to a 16-bit asynchronous memory, this pin is the 2nd bit of the
address.
For an 8-bit asynchronous memory, this pin is the 3rd bit of the address.
EM_A[0]/
HCNTL1/
GPIO53
J4
I/O/Z
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
23
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-8. EMIFA Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
24
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
E5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D1/
HD1
D3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D2/
HD2
F5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D3/
HD3
E3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D4/
HD4
E4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D5/
HD5
D2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D6/
HD6
F4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D7/
HD7
C1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D8/
HD8
F3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D9/
HD9
E2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D10/
HD10
G5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D11/
HD11
G4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D12/
HD12
D1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D13/
HD13
F2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D14/
HD14
H5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D15/
HD15
E1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
NAME
NO.
EM_D0/
HD0
Device Overview
DESCRIPTION
These pins are multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND) and HPI. In all cases they are
used as a 16 bit bi-directional data bus.
For EMIFA (NAND), these are EM_D[15:0].
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-8. EMIFA Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA FUNCTIONAL PINS: NAND / SMARTMEDIA / xD
EM_A[1]/
(ALE)/
HHWIL
J2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For NAND/SmartMedia/xD, it is Address Latch Enable output (ALE).
EM_A[2]/
(CLE)/
HCNTL0
J1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For NAND/SmartMedia/xD, this pin is the Command Latch Enable output (CLE).
EM_WAIT/
(RDY/BSY)/
HRDY
F1
I/O/Z
IPU
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For NAND/SmartMedia/xD, it is ready/busy input (RDY/BSY).
EM_OE/
(RE)/
HDS1
H4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For NAND/SmartMedia/xD, it is read enable output (RE).
EM_WE
(WE)/
HDS2
G2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For NAND/SmartMedia/xD, it is write enable output (WE).
EM_CS2/
HCS
C2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For EMIFA, this pin is Chip Select 2 output EM_CS2 for use with asynchronous
memories (i.e. NOR flash) or NAND flash. This is the chip select for the default boot
and ROM boot modes.
EM_CS3
B1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
For EMIFA, this pin is Chip Select 3 output EM_CS3 for use with asynchronous
memories (i.e. NOR flash) or NAND flash.
EM_CS4/
GPIO9
T2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO. For EMIFA, it is Chip Select 4
output EM_CS4 for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash) or NAND
flash.
EM_CS5/
GPIO8
T1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and GPIO. For EMIFA, it is Chip Select 5
output EM_CS5 for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash) or NAND
flash.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
25
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-8. EMIFA Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
26
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
E5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D1/
HD1
D3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D2/
HD2
F5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D3/
HD3
E3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D4/
HD4
E4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D5/
HD5
D2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D6/
HD6
F4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D7/
HD7
C1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D8/
HD8
F3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D9/
HD9
E2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D10/
HD10
G5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D11/
HD11
G4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D12/
HD12
D1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D13/
HD13
F2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D14/
HD14
H5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
EM_D15/
HD15
E1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
NAME
NO.
EM_D0/
HD0
Device Overview
DESCRIPTION
These pins are multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND) and HPI. In all cases they are
used as a 16 bit bi-directional data bus.
For EMIFA (NAND), these are EM_D[15:0].
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-9. DDR2 Memory Controller Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
W7
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Clock
DDR_CLK0
W8
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Differential clock
DDR_CKE
V8
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Clock Enable
DDR_CS
T9
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Active low chip select
DDR_WE
T8
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Active low Write enable
DDR_DQM[3]
T16
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR_DQM[2]
T14
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR_DQM[1]
T6
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR_DQM[0]
T4
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Data mask outputs
DQM3: For upper byte data bus DDR_D[31:24]
DQM2: For DDR_D[23:16]
DQM1: For DDR_D[15:8]
DQM0: For lower byte DDR_D[7:0]
DDR_RAS
U7
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Row Access Signal output
DDR_CAS
T7
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 Column Access Signal output
DDR_DQS[0]
U4
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR_DQS[1]
U6
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR_DQS[2]
U14
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR_DQS[3]
U16
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 32-bit data bus. They are outputs to
the DDR2 memory when writing and inputs when reading. They are used to
synchronize the data transfers.
DQS3 : For upper byte DDR_D[31:24]
DQS2: For DDR_D[23:16]
DQS1: For DDR_D[15:8]
DQS0: For bottom byte DDR_D[7:0]
DDR_BS[0]
U8
DDR_BS[1]
V9
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
Bank select outputs (BS[2:0]). Two are required to support 1Gb DDR2 memories.
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DDR2 address bus
NAME
NO.
DDR_CLK0
DESCRIPTION
DDR2 Memory Controller
(1)
(2)
(3)
DDR_BS[2]
U9
DDR_A[12]
W9
DDR_A[11]
W10
DDR_A[10]
U10
DDR_A[9]
U11
DDR_A[8]
V10
DDR_A[7]
V11
DDR_A[6]
W11
DDR_A[5]
W12
DDR_A[4]
V12
DDR_A[3]
U12
DDR_A[2]
V13
DDR_A[1]
U13
DDR_A[0]
W13
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
For more information, see the Recommended Operating Conditions table
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
27
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-9. DDR2 Memory Controller Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
DDR_D[31]
U19
DDR_D[30]
V19
DDR_D[29]
W18
DDR_D[28]
V18
DDR_D[27]
W17
DDR_D[26]
U18
DDR_D[25]
U17
DDR_D[24]
V17
DDR_D[23]
T17
DDR_D[22]
V16
DDR_D[21]
W16
DDR_D[20]
U15
DDR_D[19]
V15
DDR_D[18]
W15
DDR_D[17]
V14
DDR_D[16]
W14
DDR_D[15]
V7
DDR_D[14]
W6
DDR_D[13]
V6
DDR_D[12]
W5
DDR_D[11]
V5
DDR_D[10]
U5
DDR_D[9]
W4
DDR_D[8]
V4
DDR_D[7]
W3
DDR_D[6]
V3
DDR_D[5]
U3
DDR_D[4]
W2
DDR_D[3]
V2
DDR_D[2]
V1
DDR_D[1]
U2
OTHER (2) (3)
I/O/Z
DVDDR2
DESCRIPTION
DDR2 data bus can be configured as 32 bits wide or 16 bits wide.
DDR_D[0]
U1
DDR_VREF
T15
I
(3)
Reference voltage input for the SSTL_18 IO buffers.
DDR_VSSDLL
T11
GND
(3)
Ground for the DDR2 Digital Locked Loop.
S
(3)
Power (1.8 Volts) for the DDR2 Digital Locked Loop.
Impedance control for DDR2 outputs. This must be connected via a 200 Ω resistor
to DVDDR2.
Impedance control for DDR2 outputs. This must be connected via a 200 Ω resistor
to VSS.
DDR_VDDDLL
28
TYPE (1)
T10
DDR_ZN
T12
O/Z
(3)
DDR_ZP
T13
O/Z
(3)
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-10. I2C Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
I2C
(1)
(2)
SCL/
GPIO43
C4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between I2C and GPIO.
For I2C, it is clock output SCL.
SDA/
GPIO44
B4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between I2C and GPIO.
For I2C, it is bi-directional data signal SDA.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Table 2-11. Audio Serial Port (ASP) Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
Audio Serial Port (ASP)
(1)
(2)
CLKX/
GPIO29
B8
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ASP and GPIO.
For ASP, it is Transmit clock IO CLKX.
CLKR/
GPIO30
A8
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ASP and GPIO.
For ASP, it is Receive clock IO CLKR.
FSX/
GPIO31
C8
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ASP and GPIO.
For ASP, it is Transmit frame synchronization IO FSX.
FSR/
GPIO32
C7
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ASP and GPIO.
For ASP, it is Receive frame synchronization IO FSR.
DX/
GPIO33
B7
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ASP and GPIO.
For ASP, it is Data Transmit output DX.
DR/
GPIO34
A7
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ASP and GPIO.
For ASP, it is Data Receive input DR.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Table 2-12. SPI Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
(1)
(2)
SPI_EN0/
GPIO37
A4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and GPIO.
When used by SPI, it is SPI slave device 0 enable output SPI_EN0.
SPI_EN1/
GPIO42
B2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and GPIO.
When used by SPI, it is SPI slave device 1 enable output SPI_EN1.
SPI_CLK/
GPIO39
A3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and GPIO.
For SPI, it is clock output SPI_CLK.
SPI_DI/
GPIO40
B3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and GPIO.
For SPI, it is data input SPI_DI.
SPI_DO/
GPIO41
A2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and GPIO.
For SPI it is data output SPI_DO.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
29
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-13. EMAC and MDIO Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
EMAC
GPIOV33_0/
TXEN
B13
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Transmit Enable output TXEN.
GPIOV33_1/
TXCLK
A13
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Transmit Clock input TXCLK.
GPIOV33_2/
COL
A12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Collision Detect input COL.
GPIOV33_6/
TXD3
C12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Transmit Data 3 output TXD3.
GPIOV33_5/
TXD2
A11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Transmit Data 2 output TXD2.
GPIOV33_4/
TXD1
D12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Transmit Data 1 output TXD1.
GPIOV33_3/
TXD0
B12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Transmit Data 0 output TXD0.
GPIOV33_11/
RXCLK
A10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive Clock input RXCLK.
GPIOV33_12/
RXDV
D11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive Data Valid input RXDV.
GPIOV33_13/
RXER
D10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive Error input RXER.
GPIOV33_14/
CRS
C10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Carrier Sense input CRS.
GPIOV33_10/
RXD3
E11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive Data 3 input RXD3.
GPIOV33_9/
RXD2
B11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive Data 2 input RXD2.
GPIOV33_8/
RXD1
C11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive data 1 input RXD1.
GPIOV33_7/
RXD0
E12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Receive Data 0 input RXD0.
MDIO
(1)
(2)
30
GPIOV33_16/
MDCLK
B10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Management Data Clock output MDCLK.
GPIOV33_15/
MDIO
E10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In Ethernet MAC mode, it is Management Data IO MDIO.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-14. GPIOV33 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
GPIOV33
(1)
(2)
GPIOV33_16/
MDCLK
B10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_16.
GPIOV33_15/
MDIO
E10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_15.
GPIOV33_14/
CRS
C10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_14.
GPIOV33_13/
RXER
D10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_13.
GPIOV33_12/
RXDV
D11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_12.
GPIOV33_11/
RXCLK
A10
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_11.
GPIOV33_10/
RXD3
E11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_10.
GPIOV33_9/
RXD2
B11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_9.
GPIOV33_8/
RXD1
C11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_8.
GPIOV33_7/
RXD0
E12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_7.
GPIOV33_6/
TXD3
C12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_6.
GPIOV33_5/
TXD2
A11
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_5.
GPIOV33_4/
TXD1
D12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_4.
GPIOV33_3/
TXD0
B12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_3.
GPIOV33_2/
COL
A12
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_2.
GPIOV33_1/
TXCLK
A13
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, it is 3.3V GPIO GPIOV33_1.
GPIOV33_0/
TXEN
B13
I/O/Z
DVDD33
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and Ethernet MAC.
In GPIO mode, this pin is 3.3V GPIO pin GPIOV33_0.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Table 2-15. Standalone GPIOV18 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
Standalone GPIOV18
(1)
(2)
GPIO7
C3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is standalone and functions as GPIO7.
GPIO50
J5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is standalone and functions as GPIO50.
GPIO51
H1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is standalone and functions as GPIO51.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
31
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-16. USB Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
USB 2.0
Crystal input for M24 oscillator (24 MHz for USB).
M24XI
F18
I
DVDD18
If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical clock-in source is supplied, this
is the external oscillator clock input.
When the USB peripheral is not used, M24XI should be left as a No Connect.
Crystal output for M24 oscillator.
M24XO
F19
O
DVDD18
If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical clock-in source is supplied,
M24XO should be left as a No Connect.
When the USB peripheral is not used, M24XO should be left as a No Connect.
1.8-V power supply for M24 oscillator.
M24VDD
F16
S
(3)
If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical clock-in source is supplied,
M24VDD should still be connected to the 1.8-V power supply.
When the USB peripheral is not used, M24VDD should be connected to the 1.8-V
power supply.
Ground for M24 oscillator.
M24VSS
F17
GND
(3)
If a crystal input is not used, but instead a physical clock-in source is supplied,
M24VSS should still be connected to ground.
When the USB peripheral is not used, M24VSS should be connected to ground.
5-V input that signifies that VBUS is connected.
USB_VBUS
USB_ID
J17
J16
A I/O
(3)
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VBUS signal should be either
pulled down or pulled up via a 10-kΩ resistor.
USB operating mode identification pin. For Host mode operation, pull down this pin
to ground (VSS) via an external 1.5-kΩ resistor. For Device mode operation, pull up
this pin to DVDD33 rail via an external 1.5-kΩ resistor.
A I/O
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_ID signal should be either pulled
down or pulled up via a 10-kΩ resistor.
USB_DP
G19
A I/O
USB bi-directional Data Differential signal pair [positive/negative].
USB_DM
H19
A I/O
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_DP signal should be pulled high
and the USB_DM signal should be pulled down via a 10-kΩ resistor.
USB_R1
H18
A I/O
(3)
Reference current output. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to
USB_VSSREF.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_R1 signal should be connected via
a 10-kΩ resistor to USB_VSSREF.
GND
(3)
USB_VSSREF
G16
USB_VDDA3P3
J19
S
(3)
USB_VSSA3P3
J18
GND
(3)
USB_VDD1P8
H17
S
(3)
Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to
USB_R1.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected
to VSS.
Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB phy.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be
connected to DVDD33.
Analog ground for USB phy. When the USB peripheral is not used, the
USB_VSSA3P3 signal should be connected to VSS.
1.8-V I/O power supply for USB phy.
(1)
(2)
(3)
32
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P8 signal should be connected
to DVDD18.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
For more information, see the Recommended Operating Conditions table
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-16. USB Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
USB_VSS1P8
H16
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
GND
(3)
S
(3)
DESCRIPTION
I/O Ground for USB phy.
USB_VDDA1P2LDO
USB_VSSA1P2LDO
G18
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSS1P8 signal should be connected
to VSS.
Core Power supply LDO output for USB phy. This must be connected via a 1-µF
capacitor to VSS.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P2LDO signal should still be
connected via a 1-µF capacitor to VSS.
G17
GND
Submit Documentation Feedback
(3)
Core Ground for USB phy. This is the ground for the LDO and must be connected to
VSS.
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSA1P2LDO signal should still be
connected to VSS.
Device Overview
33
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-17. VPFE Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
Pixel clock input used to load image data into the CCD Controller (CCDC) on pins
CI[7:0] and YI[7:0].
DESCRIPTION
VIDEO/IMAGE IN (VPFE)
PCLK
M19
I
–
DVDD18
VD
L19
I/O/Z
–
DVDD18
Vertical synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an output
(master mode), which signals the start of a new frame to the CCDC.
HD
M18
I/O/Z
–
DVDD18
Horizontal synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an
output (master mode), which signals the start of a new line to the CCDC.
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2.
When used by the CCDC as input CI7, it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD Analog-Front-End (AFE) mode, it is input CCD15.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB7 and CR7 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y7, CB7, and CR7 of the upper
8-bit channel.
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2.
When used by the CCDC as input CI6, it supports several modes. In 16-bit CCD
AFE mode, it is input CCD14.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB6 and CR6 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y6, CB6, and CR6 of the upper
8-bit channel.
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2. When used by the CCDC as
input CI5, it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD13.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB5 and CR5 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y5, CB5, and CR5 of the upper
8-bit channel.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2. When used by the CCDC as
input CI4, it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD12.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB4 and CR4 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y4, CB4, and CR4 of the upper
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input CI3 and it supports several modes. In 16-bit CCD AFE
mode, it is input CCD11.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB3 and CR3 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y3, CB3, and CR3 of the upper
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input CI2 and it supports several modes. In 16-bit CCD AFE
mode, it is input CCD10.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB2 and CR2 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y2, CB2, and CR2 of the upper
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input CI1 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD9.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB1 and CR1 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y1, CB1, and CR1 of the upper
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input CI0 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD8.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between CB0 and CR0 inputs.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y0, CB0, and CR0 of the upper
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI7 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD7.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y7.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y7, CB7, and CR7 of the lower
8-bit channel.
CI7/
CCD15/
UART_RXD2
CI6/
CCD14/
UART_TXD2
CI5/
CCD13/
UART_CTS2
CI4/
CCD12/
UART_RTS2
CI3/
CCD11
CI2/
CCD10
CI1/
CCD9
CI0/
CCD8
YI7/
CCD7
(1)
(2)
(3)
34
N19
N18
N17
N16
N15
M17
M16
M15
L18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-17. VPFE Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
YI6/
CCD6
YI5/
CCD5
YI4/
CCD4
YI3/
CCD3
YI2/
CCD2
YI1/
CCD1
NO.
L17
L16
L15
K19
K18
K17
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI6 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD6.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y6.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y6, CB6, and CR6 of the lower
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI5 and it supports several modes. In 16-bit CCD AFE
mode, it is input CCD5.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y5.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y5, CB5, and CR5 of the lower
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI4 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD Analog-Front-End (AFE) mode, it is input CCD4.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y4.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y4, CB4, and CR4 of the lower
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI3 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD3.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y3.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y3, CB3, and CR3 of the lower
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI2 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD2.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y2.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y2, CB2, and CR2 of the lower
8-bit channel.
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI1 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD1.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y1.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y1, CB1, and CR1 of the lower
8-bit channel.
YI0/
CCD0
K16
I
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is CCDC input YI0 and it supports several modes.
In 16-bit CCD AFE mode, it is input CCD0.
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, it is input Y0.
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, it is time multiplexed between Y0, CB0, and CR0 of the lower
8-bit channel.
GPIO1/
C_WE
E13
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and the VPFE.
In VPFE mode, it is the CCD Controller write enable input C_WE.
GPIO4/
R0/
C_FIELD
B14
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO, the VPFE, and the VPBE.
In VPFE mode, it is CCDC field identification bidirectional signal C_FIELD.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
35
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-18. VPBE Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
VPBE Horizontal Sync signal that can be either an input or an output.
DESCRIPTION
VIDEO OUT (VPBE)
(1)
(2)
(3)
36
HSYNC
C17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
VSYNC
C18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
VPBE Vertical Sync signal that can be either an input or an output.
VCLK
D19
I/O/Z
DVDD18
VPBE Clock Output
VPBE Clock Input
VPBECLK
C19
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
COUT0/
B3/
BTSEL0
A16
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ARM boot mode and the VPBE.
After reset, this pin is either video encoder outputs COUT0, or
RGB666/888 Blue output data bits 3, B3.
COUT1/
B4/
BTSEL1
B16
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between ARM boot mode and the VPBE.
After reset, this pin is either video encoder outputs COUT1, or
RGB666/888 Blue output data bits 4, B4.
COUT2/
B5/
EM_WIDTH
A17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and the VPBE.
After reset, it is video encoder output COUT2 or RGB666/888 Blue output
data bit 5 B5.
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
For proper device operation, at reset this pin must be externally pulled
down via a 10-kΩ resistor.
COUT3/
B6
B17
COUT4/
B7
A18
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output COUT4 or RGB666/888 Blue data bit 7 output B7.
COUT5/
G2
B18
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output COUT5 or RGB666/888 Green data bit 2 output G2.
COUT6/
G3
B19
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output COUT6 or RGB666/888 Green data bit 3 output G3.
COUT7/
G4
C16
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output COUT7 or RGB666/888 Green data bit 4 output G4.
YOUT0/
G5/
AEAW0
D15
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT1/
G6/
AEAW1
D16
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT2/
G7/
AEAW2
D17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT3/
R3/
AEAW3
D18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT4/
R4/
AEAW4
E15
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
YOUT5/
R5
E16
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output YOUT5 or RGB666/888 Red data bit 5 output R5.
YOUT6/
R6
E17
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output YOUT6 or RGB666/888 Red data bit 6 output R6.
YOUT7/
R7
E18
O
DVDD18
Video encoder output YOUT7 or RGB666/888 Red data bit 7 output R7.
GPIO0/
LCD_OE
C13
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and the VPBE.
In VPBE mode, it is the LCD output enable LCD_OE.
After reset, it is video encoder output COUT3 or RGB666/888 Blue data
bit 6 output B6.
These pins are multiplexed between EMIFA and the VPBE.
After reset, these are video encoder outputs YOUT[0:4] or RGB666/888
Red and Green data bit outputs G5, G6, G7, R3, and R4.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-18. VPBE Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
D13
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and the VPBE.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Green data bit 0 output G0.
GPIO3/
B0/
LCD_FIELD
C14
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO, and the VPBE.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Blue data bit 0 output B0 or LCD interlaced
bidirectional LCD_FIELD.
GPIO4/
R0/
C_FIELD
B14
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO, the VPFE, and the VPBE.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Red data bit 0 output R0.
GPIO5/
G1
E14
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and the VPBE.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Green data bit 1 output G1.
GPIO6/
B1
A14
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and the VPBE.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Blue data bit 1 output B1.
GPIO38/
R1
D14
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between VPBE and GPIO.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Red output data bit 1.
PWM1/
R2/
GPIO46
B15
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between PWM1, VPBE, and GPIO.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Red output bit 2 (R2).
PWM2/
B2/
GPIO47
A15
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between PWM2, VPBE, and GPIO.
In VPBE mode, it is RGB888 Blue output bit 2 (B2).
NAME
NO.
GPIO2/
G0
DESCRIPTION
Table 2-19. DAC [Part of VPBE] Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
(3)
DESCRIPTION
DAC[A:D]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Reference voltage input (0.5 V). When the DAC is not used, the DAC_VREF signal
should be connected to VSS.
DAC_VREF
R17
AI
DAC_IOUT_A
P19
AO
Output of DAC A. When the DAC is not used, the DAC_IOUT_A signal should be
left as a No Connect.
DAC_IOUT_B
P18
AO
Output of DAC B. When the DAC is not used, the DAC_IOUT_B signal should be
left as a No Connect.
DAC_IOUT_C
R19
AO
Output of DAC C. When the DAC is not used, the DAC_IOUT_C signal should be
left as a No Connect.
VDDA_1P8V
R18
S
(3)
1.8-V analog I/O power. When the DAC is not used, the VDDA_1P8V signal should be
connected to VSS.
VSSA_1P8V
P17
GND
(3)
Analog I/O ground. When the DAC is not used, the VSSA_1P8V signal should be
connected to VSS.
VDDA_1P1V
P16
S
(3)
1.20-V analog core supply voltage. When the DAC is not used, the VDDA_1P1V signal
should be connected to VSS.
VSSA_1P1V
T18
GND
(3)
Analog core ground. When the DAC is not used, the VSSA_1P1V signal should be
connected to VSS.
DAC_RBIAS
R16
AI
(3)
External resistor connection for current bias configuration. This pin must be
connected via a 4-kΩ resistor to VSSA_1P8V. When the DAC is not used, the
DAC_RBIAS signal should be connected to VSS.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
For more information, see the Recommended Operating Conditions table
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
37
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-20. UART0, UART1, UART2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
UART2
CI7/
CCD15/
UART_RXD2
N19
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2.
When used by UART2 it is the receive data input UART_RXD2.
CI6/
CCD14/
UART_TXD2
N18
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2.
In UART2 mode, it is the transmit data output UART_TXD2.
CI5/
CCD13/
UART_CTS2
N17
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2.
In UART2 mode, it is the clear to send input UART_CTS2.
CI4/
CCD12/
UART_RTS2
N16
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the CCDC and UART2.
In UART2 mode, it is the ready to send output UART_RTS2.
UART_TXD1
H3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is transmit data output UART_TXD1.
UART_RXD1
G1
I/O/Z
IPD
DVDD18
This pin is receive data input UART_RXD1.
UART1
UART0
(1)
(2)
(3)
38
UART_RXD0/
GPIO35
D5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between UART0 and GPIO.
For UART0, it is receive data input UART_RXD0.
UART_TXD0/
GPIO36
C5
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between UART0 and GPIO. .
For UART0, it is transmit data output UART_TXD0.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-21. PWM0, PWM1, PWM2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
PWM2
PWM2/
B2/
GPIO47
A15
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between PWM2, VPBE, and GPIO.
For PWM2, it is output PWM2.
PWM1
PWM1/
R2/
GPIO46
B15
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between PWM1, VPBE, and GPIO.
For PWM1, it is output PWM1.
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between PWM0 and GPIO.
For PWM0, it is output PWM0.
PWM0
PWM0/
GPIO45
(1)
(2)
C15
I/O/Z
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
39
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-22. MMC/S-D/SDIO Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
A9
O
DVDD33
Data clock output SD_CLK
SD_CMD
B9
I/O/Z
DVDD33
Bi-directional command IO SD_CMD
SD_DATA3
C9
I/O/Z
SD_DATA2
D9
I/O/Z
SD_DATA1
E9
I/O/Z
DVDD33
These pins are the nibble wide bi-directional data bus SD_DATA[3:0].
SD_DATA0
D8
I/O/Z
NAME
NO.
SD_CLK
DESCRIPTION
MMC/SD/SDIO
(1)
(2)
40
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-23. HPI Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
Host-Port Interface (HPI)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EM_CS3
B1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
For EMIFA, this pin is Chip Select 3 output.
In HPI mode this pin must be pulled high via an external 10-kΩ resistor.
EM_BA[0]/
HINT
J3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
In HPI mode, it is the host interrupt output HINT.
EM_A[0]/
HCNTL1/
GPIO53
J4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA, HPI, and GPIO.
For HPI, it is control input HCNTL1. The state of HCNTL1 and HCNTL0 determine
if address, data, or control information is being transmitted between an external
host and the DM357.
EM_A[2]/
(CLE)/
HCNTL0
J1
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD), and HPI.
In HPI mode, it is control input HCNTL0. The state of HCNTL1 and HCNTL0
determine if address, data, or control information is being transmitted between an
external host and the DM357.
EM_A[1]/
(ALE)/
HHWIL
J2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD), and HPI.
In HPI mode, it is Half-word identification input HHWIL.
EM_R/W/
HR/W
G3
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
For HPI, it is the Host Read Write input HR/W. This signal is active high for reads
and low for writes.
EM_CS2/
HCS
C2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA and HPI.
In HPI mode, this pin is HPI Active Low Chip Select input HCS.
EM_WE
(WE)
HDS2
G2
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For HPI, it is data strobe 2 input HDS2.
EM_OE/
(RE)/
HDS1
H4
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For HPI, it is data strobe 1 input HDS1.
EM_WAIT/
(RDY/BSY)/
HRDY
F1
I/O/Z
IPU
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND/SmartMedia/xD) and HPI.
For HPI, it is ready output HRDY.
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
41
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. HPI Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
42
NAME
NO.
EM_D15/
HD15
E1
EM_D14/
HD14
H5
EM_D13/
HD13
F2
EM_D12/
HD12
D1
EM_D11/
HD11
G4
EM_D10/
HD10
G5
EM_D9/
HD9
E2
EM_D8/
HD8
F3
EM_D7/
HD7
C1
EM_D6/
HD6
F4
EM_D5/
HD5
D2
EM_D4/
HD4
E4
EM_D3/
HD3
E3
EM_D2/
HD2
F5
EM_D1/
HD1
D3
EM_D0/
HD0
E5
Device Overview
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
I/O/Z
DVDD18
DESCRIPTION
These pins are multiplexed between EMIFA (NAND) and HPI.
In HPI mode, these are HD[15:0] and are multiplexed internally with the HPI
address lines.
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-24. Timer 0, Timer 1, and Timer 2 Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2)
DESCRIPTION
Timer 2 and Timer 1
No external pins. The Timer 2 and Timer 1 peripheral pins are not pinned out as external pins.
Timer 0
CLK_OUT1/
TIM_IN/
GPIO49
(1)
(2)
E19
I/O/Z
DVDD18
This pin is multiplexed between the USB clock generator, timer, and GPIO.
For Timer0, it is the timer event capture input TIM_IN.
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Table 2-25. Reserved Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER (2) (3)
DESCRIPTION
RESERVED
(1)
(2)
(3)
RSV1
A1
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV2
A19
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV3
W1
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV4
W19
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
IPD
VSS
RSV5
D4
I
Reserved. This pin must be tied directly to VSS for normal device operation.
RSV6
L3
AO
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV7
R8
A
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV24
M3
S
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV45
T19
AO
Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
43
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-26. Supply Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS
F10
F11
DVDD33
F12
S
3.3 V I/O supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data manual)
S
1.8 V I/O supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data manual)
S
1.8 V DDR2 I/O supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data manual)
F13
N5
G15
F14
J15
H14
K14
M14
L13
G9
DVDD18
F8
E7
G7
J7
L7
F6
H6
K6
M6
T5
P6
N7
P8
N9
R9
DVDDR2
P10
N11
R11
P12
N13
R13
P14
R15
(1)
44
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-26. Supply Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
F15
H8
H10
H11
H12
J9
J10
J11
J13
K8
CVDD
K9
S
1.20 V core supply voltage (-270 devices)
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data manual)
K10
K11
K12
L8
L9
L10
L11
M8
M10
M12
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
45
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 2-27. Ground Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS
K5
M5
G6
J6
L6
N6
R6
F7
H7
K7
M7
P7
R7
E8
G8
J8
N8
F9
H9
VSS
M9
GND
Ground pins
P9
G10
N10
R10
G11
M11
P11
G12
J12
N12
L12
R12
G13
H13
K13
M13
P13
G14
J14
(1)
46
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 2-27. Ground Terminal Functions (continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE (1)
OTHER
DESCRIPTION
L14
N14
VSS
R14
H15
GND
Ground pins
K15
P15
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
47
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
2.8 Device Support
2.8.1
Development Support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320DM357 SoC platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules. The tool's support documentation is electronically
available within the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE).
The following products support development of TMS320DM357 SoC-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320DM357 SoC platform, visit the
Texas Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator
(URL). For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized
distributor.
2.8.2
Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
devices and support tools. Each DM357 commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX, TMP,
or TMS (e.g., TMS320DM357ZWT). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix
designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of
product development from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production
devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications.
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification.
TMS
Fully-qualified production device.
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product.
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following
disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are
to be used.
48
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, ZWT), the temperature range (for example, "Blank" is the commercial
temperature range), and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, "Blank" is the default
[270-MHz ARM9]).
Figure 2-5 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any TMS320DM357 SoC platform
member.
TMS
320
DM357
A
ZWT
( )
( )
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
Blank = 270-MHz ARM9
PREFIX
TMX = Experimental device
TMS = Qualified device
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 85°C)
Blank = 0° C to 85° C, commercial temperature
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320™ DSP Family
(A)
DEVICE(B)
DM35x DMSoC:
DM357
PACKAGE TYPE
ZWT = 361-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-Free soldered balls
SILICON REVISION:
A =Silicon 2.1
A. BGA = Ball Grid Array
B. For actual part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI websitr (http://www.ti.com)
Figure 2-5. Device Nomenclature
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
49
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2.8.3
www.ti.com
Documentation Support
2.8.3.1 Related Documentation From Texas Instruments
The following documents describe the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). Copies of
these documents are available on the Internet at www.ti.com. Tip: Enter the literature number in the
search box provided at www.ti.com.
50
SPRUG06
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Video Processing Back End (VPBE) User's Guide. Describes the
video processing back end (VPBE) in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC) video processing subsystem. Included in the VPBE is the video encoder,
on-screen display, and digital LCD controller.
SPRUG25
TMS320DM357 DMSoC ARM Subsystem Reference Guide. Describes the ARM
subsystem in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The ARM
subsystem is designed to give the ARM926EJ-S (ARM9) master control of the device. In
general, the ARM is responsible for configuration and control of the device; including the
video processing subsystem, and a majority of the peripherals and external memories.
SPRUG26
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) User's
Guide. This document describes the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART)
peripheral in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The UART
peripheral performs serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral device,
and parallel-to-serial conversion on data received from the CPU.
SPRUG27
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Peripheral User's Guide. Describes
the inter-integrated circuit (I2C) peripheral in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media
System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The I2C peripheral provides an interface between the DMSoC
and other devices compliant with the I2C-bus specification and connected by way of an
I2C-bus. External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit and receive up
to 8-bit wide data to and from the DMSoC through the I2C peripheral. This document
assumes the reader is familiar with the I2C-bus specification.
SPRUG28
TMS320DM357 DMSoC 64-Bit Timer User's Guide. Describes the operation of the
software-programmable 64-bit timer in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC). Timer 0 and Timer 1 are used as general-purpose (GP) timers and can be
programmed in 64-bit mode, dual 32-bit unchained mode, or dual 32-bit chained mode;
Timer 2 is used only as a watchdog timer. The GP timer modes can be used to generate
periodic interrupts or enhanced direct memory access (EDMA) synchronization events. The
watchdog timer mode is used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of
a fault condition, such as a non-exiting code loop.
SPRUG29
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) User's Guide. Describes the
serial peripheral interface (SPI) in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC). The SPI is a high-speed synchronous serial input/output port that allows a serial
bit stream of programmed length (1 to 16 bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a
programmed bit-transfer rate. The SPI is normally used for communication between the
DMSoC and external peripherals. Typical applications include an interface to external I/O or
peripheral expansion via devices such as shift registers, display drivers, SPI EPROMs and
analog-to-digital converters.
SPRUG30
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Host Port Interface (HPI) Reference Guide. This document
describes the host port interface in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC). The HPI provides a parallel port interface through which an external host
processor can directly access the TMS320DM357 DMSoC processor's resources
(configuration and program/data memories).
SPRUG31
TMS320DM357 DMSoC General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) User's Guide. Describes
the general-purpose input/output (GPIO) peripheral in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The GPIO peripheral provides dedicated general-purpose pins
that can be configured as either inputs or outputs. When configured as an input, you can
detect the state of the input by reading the state of an internal register. When configured as
an output, you can write to an internal register to control the state driven on the output pin.
SPRUG32
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Multimedia Card (MMC)/Secure Digital (SD) Card Controller
User's Guide. Describes the multimedia card (MMC)/secure digital (SD) card controller in
the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The MMC/SD card is used in a
number of applications to provide removable data storage. The MMC/SD controller provides
an interface to external MMC and SD cards. The communication between the MMC/SD
controller and MMC/SD card(s) is performed by the MMC/SD protocol.
SPRUG33
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Asynchronous External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide.
Describes the asynchronous external memory interface (EMIF) in the TMS320DM357 Digital
Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The EMIF supports a glueless interface to a variety of
external devices.
SPRUG34
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller User's
Guide. Describes the operation of the enhanced direct memory access (EDMA3) controller
in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The EDMA3 controller’s
primary purpose is to service user-programmed data transfers between two memory-mapped
slave endpoints on the DMSoC.
SPRUG35
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Audio Serial Port (ASP) User's Guide. Describes the operation of
the audio serial port (ASP) audio interface in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media
System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The primary audio modes that are supported by the ASP are the
AC97 and IIS modes. In addition to the primary audio modes, the ASP supports general
serial port receive and transmit operation, but is not intended to be used as a high-speed
interface.
SPRUG36
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)/Management Data
Input/Output (MDIO) Module User's Guide. Discusses the ethernet media access
controller (EMAC) and physical layer (PHY) device management data input/output (MDIO)
module in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The EMAC controls
the flow of packet data from the DMSoC to the PHY. The MDIO module controls PHY
configuration and status monitoring.
SPRUG37
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM) Peripheral User's Guide.
Describes the pulse-width modulator (PWM) peripheral in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media
System-on-Chip (DMSoC).
SPRUG38
TMS320DM357 DMSoC DDR2 Memory Controller User's Guide. Describes the DDR2
memory controller in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The
DDR2 memory controller is used to interface with JESD79D-2A standard compliant DDR2
SDRAM devices.
SPRUG39
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Video Processing Front End (VPFE) User's Guide. Describes the
video processing front end (VPFE) in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC) video processing subsystem. Included in the VPFE is the preview engine, CCD
controller, resizer, histogram, and hardware 3A (H3A) statistic generator.
SPRUGH2
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Peripherals Overview Reference Guide. This document provides
an overview of the peripherals in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC).
SPRUGH3
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Universal Serial Bus Controller User's Guide. This document
describes the universal serial bus (USB) controller in the TMS320DM357 Digital Media
System-on-Chip (DMSoC). The USB controller supports data throughput rates up to 480
Mbps. It provides a mechanism for data transfer between USB devices and also supports
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
51
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
host negotiation.
52
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
3 Device Configurations
3.1 System Module Registers
The system module includes status and control registers required for configuration of the device. Brief
descriptions of the various registers are shown in Table 3-1. System Module registers required for device
configurations are discussed in the following sections.
Table 3-1. System Module Register Memory Map
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
0x01C4 0000
PINMUX0
Pin multiplexing control 0. For details, see Section 3.5.4, PINMUX0 Register
Description.
0x01C4 0004
PINMUX1
Pin multiplexing control 1. For details, see Section 3.5.5, PINMUX1 Register
Description.
0x01C4 0008
–
Reserved.
0x01C4 000C
–
Reserved
0x01C4 0010
–
Reserved.
0x01C4 0014
BOOTCFG
0x01C4 0018 - 0x01C4 0027
–
0x01C4 0028
JTAGID
DESCRIPTION
Device boot configuration. For details, see Section 3.3.1.1, BOOTCFG
Register Description.
Reserved.
JTAGID/Device ID number. For details, see Section 6.23.1, JTAG ID Register
Description.
0x01C4 002C
–
0x01C4 0030
HPI_CTL
Reserved.
0x01C4 0034
USBPHY_CTL
HPI control. For details, see Section 3.5.6.10, HPI and EMIFA Pin
Multiplexing.
USB PHY control. For details, see Section 6.14.1, USBPHY_CTL Register
Description.
0x01C4 0038
–
0x01C4 003C
MSTPRI0
Reserved.
Bus master priority control 0. For details, see Section 3.5.1, Switched Central
Resource (SCR) Bus Priorities.
0x01C4 0040
MSTPRI1
Bus master priority control 1. For details, see Section 3.5.1, Switched Central
Resource (SCR) Bus Priorities.
0x01C4 0044
VPSS_CLKCTL
0x01C4 0048
VDD3P3V_PWDN
0x01C4 004C
DRRVTPER
0x01C4 0050 - 0x01C4 006F
–
VPSS clock control.
VDD 3.3V I/O powerdown control. For details, see Section 3.2.1, Power
Configurations after Reset.
Enables access to the DDR2 VTP Register.
Reserved.
3.2 Power Considerations
Global device power domains are controlled by the Power and Sleep Controller, except as shown in the
following sections.
3.2.1
Power Configurations after Reset
The VDD3P3V_PWDN register controls power to the 3.3V I/O buffers for MMC/SD/SDIO and GPIOV33.
The 3.3V I/Os are separated into two groups for independent control as shown in Figure 3-1 and
described in Table 3-2. By default, these pins are all disabled at reset.
Figure 3-1. VDD3P3V_PWDN Register
31
2
1
0
RESERVED
IOPWDN1
IOPWDN0
R-0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00
R/W-1
R/W-1
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
53
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 3-2. VDD3P3V_PWDN Register Description
NAME
DESCRIPTION
IOPWDN0
GIOV33 I/O Powerdown controls GIOV33[16:0] pins.
0 = I/O buffers powered up
1 = I/O buffers powered down
IOPWDN1
MMC/SD/SDIO I/O Powerdown controls SD_CLK, SD_CMD, SD_DATA[3:0] pins.
0 = I/O buffers powered up
1 = I/O buffers powered down
3.3 Bootmode
The device is booted through multiple means: pin states captured at reset, primary bootloaders within
internal ROM or EMIFA, and secondary user bootloaders from peripherals or external memories. Boot
modes, pin configurations, and register configurations required for booting the device, are described in the
following sections.
3.3.1
Bootmode Registers
The BOOTCFG register is described in the following sections. At reset, the status of various pins required
for proper boot are stored within this register.
3.3.1.1 BOOTCFG Register Description
The BOOTCFG register (located at address 0x01C4 000A) contains the status values of the BTSEL1,
BTSEL0, EM_WIDTH, and AEAW[4:0] pins captured at the rising edge of RESET. The register format is
shown in Figure 3-2 and bit field descriptions are shown in Table 3-3. The captured bits are software
readable after reset.
Figure 3-2. BOOTCFG Register
31
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RESERVED
RSV
BTSEL
EM_WIDTH
DAEAW
R-0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
R-L
R-LL
R-L
R-LLLLL
1
0
LEGEND: R = Read; W = Write; L = pin state latched at reset rising; -n = value after reset
Table 3-3. BOOTCFG Register Description
NAME
BTSEL
DESCRIPTION
ARM Boot mode selection pin states (BTSEL1, BTSEL0) captured at the rising edge of RESET.
‘00’ indicates ARM boots from ROM (NAND Flash).
‘01’ indicates that ARM boots from EMIFA (NOR Flash).
‘10’ indicates that ARM boots from ROM (HPI).
‘11’ indicates that ARM boots from ROM (UART0).
RSV
For proprer device operation, this bit should always be "0".
EM_WIDTH
EMIFA data bus width selection pin state captured at the rising edge of RESET.
‘0’ sets EMIFA to 8 bit data bus width
‘1’ sets EMIFA to 16 bit data bus width.
DAEAW
3.3.2
EMIFA address bus width selection pin states (AEAW[4:0]) captured at the rising edge of RESET. This configures
EMIFA address pins multiplexed with GPIO. See Table 3-6,Table 3-7, and Table 3-8
ARM Boot
The DM357 ARM can boot from EMIFA, internal ROM (NAND), UART0, or HPI, as determined by the
setting of the BTSEL[1:0] pins. The BTSEL[1:0] pins are read by the ARM ROM Boot Loader (RBL) to
further define the ROM boot mode. The ARM boot modes are summarized in Table 3-4.
54
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 3-4. ARM Boot Modes
BTSEL1
BTSEL0
0
0
0
1
1
BOOT MODE
ARM RESET
VECTOR
BRIEF DESCRIPTION
ARM NAND RBL
0x0000 4000
Up to 14 K-bytes secondary boot loader through NAND with up
to 2 K-bytes page sizes.
1
ARM EMIFA External Boot
0x0200 0000
EMIFA EM_CS2 external memory space.
0
ARM HPI RBL
0x0000 4000
Up to 14 K-btyes secondary boot loader through an external
host.
1
ARM UART RBL
0x0000 4000
Up to 14 K-bytes secondary boot loader through UART0.
When the BTSEL[1:0] pins are set to the ARM EMIFA External Boot ("01"), the ARM immediately begins
executing code from the EMIFA EM_CS2 memory space (0x0200 0000). When the BTSEL[1:0] pins
indicate a condition other than the ARM EMIFA External Boot (!01), the RBL begins execution.
ARM NAND Boot mode has the following features:
• Loads a secondary User Boot Loader (UBL) from NAND flash to ARM Internal RAM (AIM) and
transfers control to the user software.
• Support for NAND with page sizes up to 2048 bytes.
• Support for error correction when loading UBL
• Support for up to 14KB UBL
• Optional, user selectable, support for use of DMA, I-cache, and PLL enable while loading UBL
ARM UART Boot mode has the following features:
• Loads a secondary UBL via UART0 to AIM and transfers control to the user software.
• Support for up to 14KB UBL
ARM HPI Boot Mode has the following features:
• No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, waits for external host to load a secondary UBL via HPI to
AIM and transfers control to the user software.
• Support for up to 14KB UBL.
For further details on the ROM Bootloader, refer to the ARM Subsystem Users Guide.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
55
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
3.4 Configurations at Reset
The following sections give information on configuration settings for the device at reset.
3.4.1
Device Configuration at Device Reset
Table 3-5 shows a summary of device inputs required for booting the ARM and configuring EMIFA data
and address bus widths for proper operation of the device at the rising edge of the RESET input.
Table 3-5. Device Configurations (Input Pins Sampled at Reset)
DEVICE SIGNALS
SAMPLED
AT RESET
DEVICE SIGNAL NAME
AFTER RESET
BTSEL[1:0]
COUT[1:0]
DESCRIPTION
ARM Boot mode selection pins.
‘00’ indicates
‘01’ indicates
‘10’ indicates
‘11’ indicates
ARM boots from ROM (NAND Flash).
that ARM boots from EMIFA (NOR Flash).
that the ARM boots from the HPI (ROM)
that ARM boots from ROM (UART0).
COUT3
COUT3
For proper device operation, this pin must be pulled down via an external 10-kΩ
resistor.
EM_WIDTH
COUT2
EMIFA data bus width selection pin.
‘0’ sets EMIFA to 8-bit data bus width
‘1’ sets EMIFA to 16-bit data bus width.
AEAW[4:0]
3.4.2
YOUT[4:0]
EMIFA address bus width selection pins for EMIFA address pins multiplexed with GPIO.
See Table 3-6, Table 3-7, and Table 3-8 for details.
Peripheral Selection at Device Reset
As briefly mentioned in Table 3-5, the state of the AEAW[4:0] pins captured at reset configures the
number of EMIFA address pins required for device boot. These values are stored in the AEAW field of the
PINMUX0 register. At reset, this provides proper addressing for external boot. Unused address pins are
available for use as GPIO. The register settings are software programmable after reset. Table 3-6,
Table 3-7, and Table 3-8 show the AEAW[4:0] bit settings and the corresponding multiplexing for EMIFA
address and GPIO pins.
The number of EMIFA address bits enabled is configurable from 0 to 23. EM_BA[1] and EM_A[21:0] pins
that are not assigned to another peripheral and not enabled as address signals become GPIO pins. The
enabled address pins are always contiguous from EM_BA[1] upwards and address bits cannot be skipped.
The exception to this are the EM_A[2:1] pins. EM_A[2:1] are usable as the ALE and CLE signals for the
NAND Flash mode of EMIFA and are always enabled as EMIFA pins. If an address width of 0 is selected,
this still allows a NAND Flash to be accessed. Also, selecting an address width of 2, 3, or 4 (AEAW[4:0] =
00010, 00011, or 00100) always results in 4 address outputs. For these and other address bit enable
settings, see Table 3-6, Table 3-7, and Table 3-8.
56
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 3-6. GPIO and EMIFA Multiplexing (Part 1)
Pin Mux Register AEAW[4:0] Bit Settings
00000
(default)
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
GPIO[52]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
GPIO[53]
GPIO[53]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
GPIO[28]
GPIO[28]
GPIO[28]
GPIO[28]
GPIO[28]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
GPIO[27]
GPIO[27]
GPIO[27]
GPIO[27]
GPIO[27]
GPIO[27]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
GPIO[26]
GPIO[26]
GPIO[26]
GPIO[26]
GPIO[26]
GPIO[26]
GPIO[26]
EM_A[5]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[25]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[24]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
57
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 3-7. GPIO and EMIFA Multiplexing (Part 2)
Pin Mux Register AEAW[4:0] Bit Settings
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
GPIO[24]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
GPIO[23]
GPIO[23]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
GPIO[22]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
GPIO[21]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
GPIO[20]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
GPIO[19]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
GPIO[18]
EM_A[13]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[17]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[16]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
58
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 3-8. GPIO and EMIFA Multiplexing (Part 3)
Pin Mux Register AEAW[4:0] Bit Settings
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
Others
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[13]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
EM_A[14]
GPIO[16]
EM_A[15]
EM_A[15]
EM_A[15]
EM_A[15]
EM_A[15]
EM_A[15]
EM_A[15]
GPIO[15]
GPIO[15]
EM_A[16]
EM_A[16]
EM_A[16]
EM_A[16]
EM_A[16]
EM_A[16]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
GPIO[14]
EM_A[17]
EM_A[17]
EM_A[17]
EM_A[17]
EM_A[17]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
GPIO[13]
EM_A[18]
EM_A[18]
EM_A[18]
EM_A[18]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
GPIO[12]
EM_A[19]
EM_A[19]
EM_A[19]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
GPIO[11]
EM_A[20]
EM_A[20]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
GPIO[10]
EM_A[21]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
59
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
3.5 Configurations After Reset
The following sections give the details on configuring the device after reset.
3.5.1
Switched Central Resource (SCR) Bus Priorities
Prioritization within the switched central resource (SCR) is programmable for each master. The register bit
fields and default priority levels for DM357 bus masters are shown in Table 3-9. The priority levels should
be tuned to obtain the best system performance for a particular application. Lower values indicate higher
priority. For most masters, their priority values are programmed at the system level by configuring the
MSTPRI0 and MSTPRI1 registers. Details on the MSTPRI0/1 registers are shown in Figure 3-3 and
Figure 3-4. The VPSS and EDMA masters contain registers that control their own priority values.
Table 3-9. DM357 Default Bus Master Priorities
PRIORITY BIT FIELD
BUS
MASTER
VPSSP
VPSS
0 (VPSS PCR Register)
EDMATC0P
EDMATC0
0 (EDMACC QUEPRI Register)
EDMATC1P
EDMATC1
0 (EDMACC QUEPRI Register)
ARM_DMAP
ARM (DMA) 1 (MSTPRI0 Register)
ARM_CFGP
ARM (CFG) 1 (MSTPRI0 Register)
EMACP
EMAC
4 (MSTPRI1 Register)
USBP
USB
4 (MSTPRI1 Register)
HPIP
HPI
4 (MSTPRI1 Register)
DEFAULT PRIORITY LEVEL
Figure 3-3. MSTPRI0 Register
31
19
15
18
16
RESERVED
RESERVED
R-0000 0000 0000 0
R/W-101
11
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
0
RESERVED
RESERVED
RSV
ARM_CFGP
RSV
ARM_DMAP
R-0000 0
R/W-001
R-0
R/W-001
R-0
R/W-001
LEGEND: R = Read; W = Write; -n = value after reset
Figure 3-4. MSTPRI1 Register
31
15
23
14
12
22
20
19
18
16
RESERVED
HPIP
RSV
RESERVED
R-0000 0000 0
R-100
R-0
R/W-100
11
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
0
RSV
RESERVED
RSV
USBP
RSV
RESERVED
RSV
EMACP
R-0
R/W-100
R-0
R/W-100
R-0
R-100
R-0
R/W-100
LEGEND: R = Read; W = Write; -n = value after reset
60
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
3.5.2
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Multiplexed Pin Configurations
There are numerous multiplexed pins that are shared by more than one peripheral. Some of these pins
are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors only at reset, and others are configured by software.
As described in detail in Section 3.4.1 and Section 3.4.2, hardware configurable multiplexed pins are
programmed by external pullup/pulldown resistors at reset to set the initial functionality of pins for use by a
single peripheral. After reset, software configurable multiplexed pins are programmable through Memory
Mapped Registers (MMR) to allow the switching of pin functionalities during run-time. See Section 3.5.3
for more details on the register settings.
A summary of the pin multiplexing is shown in Table 3-10. The EMAC peripheral shares pins with the 3.3V
GPIO pins. The ASP, UART0/1/2, SPI, I2C, and PWM0/1/2 all default to GPIO pins when not enabled.
The VPBE function of the VPSS requires additional pins to implement the RGB888 mode. These are
multiplexed with GPIOs.
Table 3-10. DM357 Multiplexed Peripheral Pins and Multiplexing Controls
MULTIPLEXED
PERIPHERALS
PRIMARY
(DEFAULT)
FUNCTION
SECONDARY (1)
FUNCTION
TERTIARY (2)
FUNCTION
EMIFA (NAND), HPI EMIFA (NAND):
HPI:
EM_A[1] (ALE),
HHWIL, HCNTL0,
EM_A[2] (CLE),
HCS
EM_CS2, EM_CS3
EMIFA, HPI
TERTIARY
REGISTER/PIN (3)
CONTROL
PinMux0:HPIEN,
Pins:BTSEL[1:0] = 10
N/A
HPI:
HD[0:15], HINT
N/A
PinMux0:HPIEN,
Pins:BTSEL[1:0] = 10
EMIFA (NAND), HPI EMIFA (NAND):
R/W, EM_WAIT
(RDY/BSY),
EM_OE (RE),
EM_WE (WE)
N/A
HPI:
HR/W, HRDY, HDS1,
HDS2
N/A
PinMux0:HPIEN,
Pins:BTSEL[1:0] = 10
VPBE LCD, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[0]
VPBE: LCD_OE
PinMux0:LOEEN
VPFE CCD, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[1]
VPFE: C_WE
PinMux0:CWE
VPBE RGB888,
GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[2]
VPBE:
RGB888 G0
PinMux0:RGB888
VPBE
GPIO:GPIO[3]
LCD/RGB888, GPIO
VPBE:
RGB888 B0
VPBE:
LCD_FIELD
PinMux0:RGB888
PinMux0:LFLDEN
VPFE CCD, VPBE
RGB888, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[4]
VPBE:
RGB888 R0
VPFE:
CCD_FIELD
PinMux0:RGB888
PinMux0:CFLDEN
VPBE RGB888,
GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[5:6, 38]
VPBE:
RGB888 G1, B1,
R1
EMIFA, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[8]
EMIFA:
EM_CS5
N/A
PinMux0:AECS5
N/A
EMIFA, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[9]
EMIFA:
EM_CS4
N/A
PinMux0:AECS4
N/A
EMIFA, GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[10:17]
EMIFA:
EM_A[21:14]
N/A
PinMux0:AEAW,
Pins:DAEAW[4:0]
N/A
EMIFA, GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[18:28]
EMIFA:
EM_A[13:3]
PinMux0:AEAW,
Pins:DAEAW[4:0]
ASP, GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[29:34]
ASP:
(all pins) (4)
PinMux1:ASP
UART0, GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[35:36]
UART0:
RXD, TXD
PinMux1:UART0
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
EMIFA:
EM_D[0:15],
EM_BA[0]
SECONDARY
REGISTER/PIN (3)
CONTROL
PinMux0:RGB888
When the Secondary function is enabled, to avoid potential contention, ensure that the Primary (if not GPIO) and Tertiary functions are
disabled.
When the Tertiary function is enabled, to avoid potential contention, ensure that the Primary (if not GPIO), Secondary, and other Tertiary
functions are disabled.
Pin states are sampled at power on reset and written into the register fields.
See the Terminal Functions section for pin details.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
61
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 3-10. DM357 Multiplexed Peripheral Pins and Multiplexing Controls (continued)
PRIMARY
(DEFAULT)
FUNCTION
SECONDARY (1)
FUNCTION
SPI, GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[37, 39:42]
SPI:
SPI_EN0,
SPI_CLK,
SPI_DI, SPI_DO,
SPI_EN1
I2C, GPIO
GPIO:
GPIO[43:44]
I2C: SCL, SDA
PinMux1:I2C
PWM0, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[45]
PWM0
PinMux1:PWM0
PWM1, VPBE
(RGB666/RGB888),
GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[46]
VPBE:
PWM1:
RGB666/RGB888 PWM1
R2
PinMux0:RGB666/
PinMux0:RGB888
PinMux1:PWM1
PWM2, VPBE
(RGB666/RGB888),
GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[47]
VPBE:
PWM2:
RGB666/RGB888 PWM2
B2
PinMux0:RGB666/
PinMux0:RGB888
PinMux1:PWM2
ClockOut0, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[48]
CLK_OUT0
PinMux1:CLK0
ClockOut1, TIMER0, GPIO:GPIO[49]
GPIO
CLK_OUT1
TIMER0:
TIM_IN
PinMux1:CLK1
PinMux1:TIM_IN
EMIFA, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[52]
EMIFA:
EM_BA[1]
N/A
PinMux0:AEAW[4:0],
Pins:DAEAW[4:0]
N/A
EMIFA, HPI, GPIO
GPIO:GPIO[53]
EMIFA:
EM_A[0]
HPI: HCNTL1
PinMux0:AEAW[4:0],
Pins:DAEAW[4:0]
PinMux0:HPIEN,
Pins:BTSEL[1:0] = 10
EMAC, GPIO3V
GPIO:
GPIO3V[0:13]
EMAC:
(all pins, except
CRS) (4)
PinMux0:EMACEN
EMAC, MDIO,
GPIO3V
GPIO:
GPIO3V[14:16]
EMAC:
CRS,
MDIO:
MDIO, MDCLK
PinMux0:EMACEN
UART2, VPFE
VPFE:
UART2:
CI[7:6]/
UART_RXD2,
CCD_DATA[15:14] UART_TXD2
PinMux1:UART2
UART2, VPFE
VPFE:
UART2:
CI[5:4]/
UART_CTS2,
CCD_DATA[13:12] UART_RTS2
PinMux1:UART2,
PinMux1:U2FLO
MULTIPLEXED
PERIPHERALS
3.5.3
TERTIARY (2)
FUNCTION
N/A
SECONDARY
REGISTER/PIN (3)
CONTROL
PinMux1:SPI
TERTIARY
REGISTER/PIN (3)
CONTROL
N/A
Peripheral Selection After Device Reset
After device reset, the PINMUX0 and PINMUX1 registers are software programmable to allow multiplexing
of shared device pins between peripherals, as given in the Terminal Functions section. Section 3.5.4,
Section 3.5.5, and Section 3.5.6 identify the register settings necessary to configure specific multiplexed
functions and show the primary (default) function after reset.
3.5.4
PINMUX0 Register Description
The PINMUX0 pin multiplexing register controls which peripheral is given ownership over shared pins
among EMAC, CCD, LCD, RGB888, RGB666, EMIFA, HPI, and GPIO peripherals. The register format is
shown in Figure 3-5 and bit field descriptions are given in Table 3-11. More details on the PINMUX0 pin
muxing fields are given in Section 3.5.6. A value of '1' enables the secondary or tertiary pin function.
62
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Figure 3-5. PINMUX0 Register (1)
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
EMACEN
RSV
HPIEN
RSV
CFLDEN
CWE
LFLDEN
LOEEN
RGB888
RGB666
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-D
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
RSV
RSV
RSV
AECS5
AECS4
Reserved
AEAW
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-00
R/W-0
R/W-0
R-00000
R/W-LLLL
5
18
17
16
Reserved
RSV
RSV
R-0000
R/W-0
R/W-0
4
0
LEGEND: R = Read; W = Write; L = pin state latched at reset rising edge; D = derived from pin states; -n = value after reset
(1)
For proper DM357 device operation, always write a value of '0' to RSV bits 30 and 17 through 12.
Table 3-11. PINMUX0 Register Description
Name
Description
EMACEN
Enable EMAC and MDIO function on default GPIO3V[0:16] pins.
HPIEN
Enable HPI module pins. Default value is derived from BTSEL[1:0] configuration inputs.
HPIEN is 1 when the BTSEL[1:0] = 10 for non-secure devices only. HPIEN default state
is always 0 for secure divices.
CFLDEN
Enable CCD C_FIELD function on default GPIO[4] pin
CWE
Enable CCD C_WE function on default GPIO[1] pin
LFLDEN
Enable LCD_FIELD function on default GPIO[3] pin
LOEEN
Enable LCD_OE function on default GPIO[0] pin
RGB888
Enable VPBE RGB888 function on default GPIO[2:6, 46:47] pins
RGB666
Enable VPBE RGB666 function on default GPIO[46:47] pins
AECS5
Enable EMIFA EM_CS5 function on GPIO[8]
AECS4
Enable EMIFA EM_CS4 function on GPIO[9]
AEAW
EMIFA address width selection. Default value is latched at reset from AEAW[4:0]
configuration input pins. This enables EMIF address function on default GPIO[10:28]
pins.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
63
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
3.5.5
www.ti.com
PINMUX1 Register Description
The PINMUX1 pin multiplexing register controls which peripheral is given ownership over shared pins
among Timer, PLL, ASP, SPI, I2C, PWM, and UART peripherals. The register format is shown in
Figure 3-6 and bit field descriptions are given in Table 3-12. More details on the PINMUX1 pin muxing
fields are given in Section 3.5.6. A value of "1" enables the secondary or tertiary pin function.
Figure 3-6. PINMUX1 Register (1)
31
19
15
11
18
17
16
Reserved
TIMIN
CLK1
CLK0
R-0000 0000 0000 0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
ASP
RSV
SPI
I2C
PWM2
PWM1
PWM0
U2FLO
UART2
UART1
UART0
R-0000 0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset
(1)
For proper DM357 device operation, always write a value of '0' to RSV bit 9.
Table 3-12. PINMUX1 Register Description
Name
64
Description
TIMIN
Enable TIM_IN function on default GPIO[49] pin
CLK1
Enable CLK_OUT1 function on default GPIO[49] pin
CLK0
Enable CLK_OUT0 function on default GPIO[48] pin
ASP
Enable ASP function on default GPIO[29:34] pins
SPI
Enable SPI function on default GPIO[37,39:42] pins
I2C
Enable I2C function on default GPIO[43:44] pins
PWM2
Enable PWM2 function on default GPIO[47] pin
PWM1
Enable PWM1 function on default GPIO[46] pin
PWM0
Enable PWM0 function on default GPIO[45] pin
U2FLO
Enable UART2 flow control function on default VPFE
CI[5:4]/CCD_DATA[13:12] pins
UART2
Enable UART2 function on default VPFE CI[7:6]/CCD_DATA[15:14]
pins
UART1
Enable UART1 function
UART0
Enable UART0 function on default GPIO[35:36] pins
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
3.5.6
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Pin Multiplexing Register Field Details
The bit fields for various pin multiplexing options within the PINMUX0 and PINMUX1 registers are
described in the following sections.
3.5.6.1 EMAC and GPIO3V Pin Multiplexing
The EMAC pin functions are selected as shown in Table 3-13. The functionality for each of the individual
pins affected by the PINMUX0 field settings is given in Table 3-14.
Table 3-13. EMAC and GPIO3V Pin Multiplexing Control
EMACEN
PIN FUNCTIONALITY SELECTED
0
GPIO3V
1
EMAC
Table 3-14. EMAC and GPIO3V Multiplexed Pins
Submit Documentation Feedback
GPIO
EMAC
GPIO3V[0]
TXEN
GPIO3V[1]
TXCLK
GPIO3V[2]
COL
GPIO3V[3]
TXD[0]
GPIO3V[4]
TXD[1]
GPIO3V[5]
TXD[2]
GPIO3V[6]
TXD[3]
GPIO3V[7]
RXD[0]
GPIO3V[8]
RXD[1]
GPIO3V[9]
RXD[2]
GPIO3V[10]
RXD[3]
GPIO3V[11]
RXCLK
GPIO3V[12]
RXDV
GPIO3V[13]
RXER
GPIO3V[14]
CRS
GPIO3V[15]
MDIO
GPIO3V[16]
MDCLK
Device Configurations
65
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
3.5.6.2 VPFE (CCD), VPBE (LCD), and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
The CCD and LCD controllers in the VPSS require multiplex control bit settings for certain modes of
operation. Bits within the PinMux0 register, which select between the CCD or LCD control signal function
and GPIO, are summarized in Table 3-15.
Table 3-15. VPFE (CCD), VPBE (LCD), and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX0 REGISTER FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
CFLDEN
LFLDEN
CWE
LOEEN
C_FIELD/
R0/
GPIO[4]
-
-
-
0
-
-
-
GPIO[0]
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
LCD_OE
-
-
0
-
-
-
GPIO[1]
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
C_WE
-
-
0
-
-
-
B0/GPIO[3] (1)
-
-
(1)
66
LCD_FIELD/
B0/
GPIO[3]
C_WE/
GPIO[1]
LCD_OE/
GPIO[0]
-
1
-
-
-
LCD_FIELD
-
-
0
-
-
-
R0/GPIO[4] (1)
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
C_FIELD
-
-
-
Depends on RGB888 bit setting, see Table 3-16
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
3.5.6.3 VPBE (RGB666 and RGB888) and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
Use of the RGB666 and RGB888 modes of the VPBE requires enabling RGB pins as shown in Table 3-16
and Table 3-17. Enabling PWM2, PWM1, CCD, and LCD functionality overrides the RGB modes. RGB666
interface pin functionality requires setting the RGB666 PINMUX0 Register bit field to ‘1’ and PINMUX1
Register bit fields PWM2 and PWM1 to ‘0’. Proper RGB888 interface operation requires setting PINMUX0
Register bit field RGB888 to ‘1’ and bit fields PWM2, PWM1, CFLDEN, and LFLDEN must be set to ‘0’.
Table 3-16. VPBE (RGB666, RGB888, and LCD), VPFE (CCD), and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX0 AND PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
RGB888
RGB666
PWM2
PWM1
CFLDEN
LFLDEN
PWM2/
B2/
GPIO[47]
PWM1/
R2/
GPIO[46]
C_FIELD/
R0/
GPIO[4]
LCD_FIELD/
B0/
GPIO[3]
0
0
0
0
0
0
GPIO[47]
GPIO[46]
GPIO[4]
GPIO[3]
-
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
LCD_FIELD
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
C_FIELD
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
PWM1
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
PWM2
-
-
-
0
1
0
0
0
0
B2
R2
GPIO[4]
GPIO[3]
1
-
0
0
0
0
B2
R2
R0
B0
Table 3-17. VPBE (RGB666, RGB888, and LCD) and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX0 AND PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
RGB888
PWM2
PWM1
CFLDEN
LFLDEN
R1/
GPIO[38]
B1/
GPIO[6]
G1/
GPIO[5]
G0/
GPIO[2]
0
0
0
0
0
GPIO[38]
GPIO[6]
GPIO[5]
GPIO[2]
1
0
0
0
0
R1
B1
G1
G0
3.5.6.4 EMIFA, UART1, SPI, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
EMIFA pin functions are active all the time. The UART1, SPI, and GPIO multiplexing is shown in
Table 3-18.
Table 3-18. EMIFA, UART1, SPI, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT
FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
UART1
SPI
UART_TXD1
UART_RXD1
SPI_EN1
GPIO[42]
1
0
UART_TXD1
UART_RXD1
GPIO[42]
1
1
UART_TXD1
UART_RXD1
SPI_EN1
3.5.6.5 EMIFA Chip Selects and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
Table 3-19 shows the EMIFA Chip Selects and GPIO pin multiplexing. The AECS5 and AECS4 bits select
between the EM_CS5/GPIO[8] and EM_CS4/GPIO[9] functions, and the AEAW field determines the
partitioning between GPIO and the upper EMIFA address pins.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
67
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 3-19. EMIFA and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX0 REGISTER BIT FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
AECS5
AECS4
EM_CS5/
GPIO[8]
EM_CS4/
GPIO[9]
0
0
GPIO[8]
GPIO[9]
0
1
GPIO[8]
EM_CS4
1
0
EM_CS5
GPIO[9]
1
1
EM_CS5
EM_CS4
3.5.6.6 Timer0 Input, CLK_OUT1, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
The multiplexing of the CLK_OUT1 and Timer0 Input (Timer 0 only) functions is shown in Table 3-20.
Table 3-20. Timer0 Input, CLK_OUT1, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
TIMIN
CLK1
CLK_OUT1/
TIM_IN/
GPIO[49]
0
0
GPIO[49]
0
1
CLK_OUT1
1
-
TIM_IN
3.5.6.7 ASP, SPI, I2C, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
When the ASP, SPI, or I2C serial port functions are not selected, their pins may be used as GPIOs as
seen in Table 3-21, Table 3-22, and Table 3-23.
Table 3-21. ASP and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT FIELD
MULTIPLEXED PINS
ASP
CLKX/
GPIO[29]
CLKR/
GPIO[30]
FSX/
GPIO[31]
FSR/
GPIO[32]
DX/
GPIO[33]
DR/
GPIO[34]
0
GPIO[29]
GPIO[30]
GPIO[31]
GPIO[32]
GPIO[33]
GPIO[34]
1
CLKX
CLKR
FSX
FSR
DX
DR
Table 3-22. SPI and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER
BIT FIELD
MULTIPLEXED PINS
SPI
SP_EN1/
GPIO[42]
SPI_DO/
GPIO[41]
SPI_DI/
GPIO[40]
SPI_CLK/
GPIO[39]
SPI_EN0/
GPIO[37]
0
GPIO[42]
GPIO[41]
GPIO[40]
GPIO[39]
GPIO[37]
1
SP_EN1
SPI_DO
SPI_DI
SPI_CLK
SPI_EN0
Table 3-23. I2C and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER
BIT FIELD
MULTIPLEXED PINS
I2C
I2C_CLK/
GPIO[43]
I2C_DATA/
GPIO[44]
0
GPIO[43]
GPIO[44]
1
I2C_CLK
I2C_DATA
3.5.6.8 PWM, RGB888, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
Table 3-24 shows the PWM0/1/2 pin multiplexing. Each PWM output is independently controlled by its
own enable bit. The PWM function has priority over RGB888 muxing (see Section 3.5.6.3).
68
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 3-24. PWM0/1/2, RGB888, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT FIELDS
MULTIPLEXED PINS
PWM2
PWM1
PWM0
RGB888
PWM2/
B2/
GPIO[47]
PWM1/
R2/
GPIO[46]
PWM0/
GPIO[45]
0
0
0
0
GPIO[47]
GPIO[46]
GPIO[45]
0
0
0
1
B2
R2
GPIO[45]
-
-
1
-
-
-
PWM0
-
1
-
-
-
PWM1
-
1
-
-
-
PWM2
-
-
3.5.6.9 UART, VPFE, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
Each UART has independent pin multiplexing control bits in the PINMUX1 register. The UART2 peripheral
may be used with or without the flow control signals. Table 3-25 shows how UART2 selection reduces the
width of the VPFE interface.
Setting the UART1 bit enables UART1 transmit and receive pin functionality.
Table 3-25. UART2, VPFE, and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER
BIT FIELDS
(1)
MULTIPLEXED PINS
UART2
U2FLO
CCD[15]/
CI[7]/
UART_RXD2
CCD[14]/
CI[6]/
UART_TXD2
CCD[13]/
CI[5]/
UART_CTS2
CCD[12]/
CI[4]/
UART_RTS2
0
-
CCD[15]/
CI[7] (1)
CCD[14]/
CI[6] (1)
CCD[13]/
CI[5] (1)
CCD[12]/
CI[4] (1)
1
0
UART_RXD2
UART_TXD2
CCD[13]/
CI[5] (1)
CCD[12]/
CI[4] (1)
1
1
UART_RXD2
UART_TXD2
UART_CTS2
UART_RTS2
Functionality set by VPFE operating mode.
As Table 3-26 shows, the UART0 pins are configurable for either UART0 transmit and receive data
functions or for GPIO.
Table 3-26. UART0 and GPIO Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX1 REGISTER BIT
FIELD
UART0
MULTIPLEXED PINS
UART_TXD0/
GPIO[36]
UART_RXD0/
GPIO[35]
0
GPIO[36]
GPIO[35]
1
UART_TXD0
UART_RXD0
3.5.6.10 HPI and EMIFA Pin Multiplexing
When the HPIEN bit is set, the HPI module is given control of most of the EMIFA control pins as well as
the EMIFA data bus. Table 3-27 shows which pins the HPI controls. HPIEN is set to 1 when the state of
the BTSEL[1:0] pins = 10 is latched at the rising edge of reset. Also, this bit can be manipulated after reset
by software. EMIFA mode functionality for the shared HPI pins is set when HPIEN is '0'.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Configurations
69
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 3-27. HPI and EMIFA Pin Multiplexing
PINMUX0
REGISTER
BIT FIELD
(1)
70
MULTIPLEXED PINS
HPI
EN
EM_CS2/
HCS
EM_A[1]/
HHWIL
HR/W/
EM_R/W
HRDY/
EM_WAIT
HDS1/
EM_OE
HDS2/
EM_WE
HCNTLA/
EM_A[2]
HCNTLB/
EM_A[0]
HINT/
EM_BA[0]
HD[15:0]/
EM_D[15:0]
0
EM_CS2
EM_A[1] (1)
EM_R/W
EM_WAIT
EM_OE
EM_WE
EM_A[2] (1)
EM_A[0] (1)
EM_BA[0]
EM_D[15:0]
1
HCS
HHWIL
HR/W
HRDY
HDS1
HDS2
HCNTLA
HCNTLB
HINT
HD[15:0]
This pin shares GPIO functionality and is set by AEAW[4:0] as shown in Table 3-12, Table 3-13, and Table 3-14.
Device Configurations
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
4 System Interconnect
On the DM357 device, the HMJCP, the ARM subsystem, the EDMA3 transfer controllers, and the system
peripherals are interconnected through a switch fabric architecture (shown in Figure 4-1). The switch fabric
is composed of multiple switched central resources (SCRs) and multiple bridges. The SCRs establish
low-latency connectivity between master peripherals and slave peripherals. Additionally, the SCRs provide
priority-based arbitration and facilitate concurrent data movement between master and slave peripherals.
Through SCR, the ARM subsystem can send data to the DDR2 Memory Controller without affecting a data
transfer between the EMAC and L2 memory. Bridges are mainly used to perform bus-width conversion as
well as bus operating frequency conversion. For example, in Figure 4-1, Bridge 8 performs a frequency
conversion between a bus operating at SYSCLK5 clock rate and a bus operating at SYSCLK3 clock rate.
Furthermore, Bridge 3 performs a bus-width conversion between a 64-bit bus and a 32-bit bus.
The HMJCP, the ARM subsystem, the EDMA3 transfer controllers, and the various system peripherals
can be classified into two categories: master peripherals and slave peripherals. Master peripherals are
typically capable of initiating read and write transfers in the system and do not rely on the EDMA3 or on a
CPU to perform transfers to and from them. The system master peripherals include the HMJCP, the ARM
subsystem, the EDMA3 transfer controllers, EMAC, USB, and VPSS. Not all master peripherals may
connect to all slave peripherals. The supported connections are designated by an X in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. System Connection Matrix
MASTER
DDR2 MEMORY CONTROLLER
SCR3 (1)
X
X
X
ARM
X
X
VPSS
X
HMJCP
(1)
(2)
SLAVE
ARM
EMAC
X
X
X
USB
X
X
X
EDMA3TC0
X
X
X
EDMA3TC1
X
X
X
HPI
X
X
X (2)
All peripherals/modules that support a connection to SCR3 have access to all peripherals/modules connected to SCR3.
HPI's access to SCR3 is limited to the power and sleep controller registers, PLL1 and PLL2 registers, and HPI configuration registers.
Submit Documentation Feedback
System Interconnect
71
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
4.1 System Interconnect Block Diagram
Figure 4-1 displays the DM357 system interconnect block diagram. The following is a list that helps
interpret this diagram:
• The direction of the arrows indicates either bus master or bus slave.
• The arrow originates at a bus master and terminates at a bus slave.
• The direction of the arrows does not indicate the direction of data flow. Data flow is typically
bi-directional for each of the documented bus paths.
• The pattern of each arrow's line indicates the clock rate at which it is operating, either SYSCLK2,
SYSCLK3, or SYSCLK5 clock rate.
• Some peripherals may have multiple instances shown in the diagram. A peripheral may have multiple
instances shown for a variety of reasons, some of which are described below:
– The peripheral/module has master port(s) for data transfers, as well as slave port(s) for register
access, data access, and/or memory access. Examples of these peripherals are HMJCP, EDMA3,
USB, EMAC, VPSS, and HPI.
– The peripheral/module has a master port as well as slave memories. An example of this is the ARM
subsystem.
EMAC
USB 2.0
HPI
32
32
64
SCR5
32
Bridge2
64
SYSCLK2 Clock Rate
SYSCLK3 Clock Rate
SYSCLK5 Clock Rate
MXI/CLKIN Rate
DDR2 Ctrl
(Mem/Reg)
32
64
VPSS
Read
Write
Read
Write
EDMA3TC0
EDMA3TC1
64
64
64
64
64
HMJCP
32
Bridge3
32
ARM
TCM
32
64
Bridge5
32
32
32
32
32
32
SCR6
32
32
SCR3
32
SCR2
32
32
32
32
ARM
32
32
Bridge7
32
32
32
USB Reg
EMAC Reg
UART0
UART1
UART2
I2C
32
HPI
SCR8
EMAC Ctrl Mod Reg
32
EMAC Ctrl Mod RAM
32
MDIO
32
VPSS Reg
32
SPI 0/1
32
PWM0
PWM1
PWM2
Timer 0
Timer 1
Timer 2
GPIO
AINTC
System Reg
32
Bridge1
32
32
32
32
HMJCP
32
EDMA3CC
EDMA3TC0
32
Bridge9
32
32
32
32
EDMA3TC1
32
64
SCR4
SCR1
64
64
32
Bridge8
PSC
32
PLLC 0
PLLC 1
SCR7
32
32
32
ASP
MMC/SD
EMIFA/NAND
Figure 4-1. System Interconnect Block Diagram
72
System Interconnect
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
5 Device Operating Conditions
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) (1)
Core (CVDD, VDDA1P1V, USB_VDDA1P2LDO (2))
Supply voltage ranges
Input voltage ranges
Output voltage ranges
I/O, 3.3V (DVDD33, USB_VDDA3P3)
(3)
-0.5 V to 1.5 V
(3)
-0.5 V to 4.2 V
I/O, 1.8V (DVDD18, DVDDR2, DDR_VDDDLL, PLLVDD18, VDDA1P8V,
USB_VDD1P8, MXVDD, M24VDD) (3)
-0.5 V to 2.5 V
VI I/O, 3.3V
-0.5 V to 4.2 V
VI I/O, 1.8V
-0.5 V to 2.5 V
VO I/O, 3.3V
-0.5 V to 4.2 V
VO I/O, 1.8V
-0.5 V to 2.5 V
Operating case temperature range, TC
(default)
0°C to 85°C
Storage temperature range, Tstg
(default)
-55°C to 150°C
(1)
(2)
(3)
Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
This pin is an internal LDO output and connected via 1 µF capacitor to USB_VSSA1P2LDO.
All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Operating Conditions
73
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
CVDD
DVDD
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Supply voltage, Core (CVDD, VDDA1P1V, USB_VDDA1P2LDO (1))
1.14
1.2
1.26
V
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3V (DVDD33, USB_DVDDA3P3)
3.15
3.3
3.45
V
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8V (DVDD18, DVDDR2, DDR_VDDDLL,
PLLVDD18, VDDA1P8V, USB_VDD1P8, MXVDD, M24VDD)
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
0
0
0
V
0.49DVDDR2
0.5DVDDR2
0.51DVDDR2
V
VSS
Supply ground (VSS, VSSA1P8V, VSSA1P1V, DDR_VSSDLL,
USB_VSSREF, USB_VSS1P8, USB_VSSA3P3, USB_VSSA1P2LDO,
MXVSS (2), M24VSS (2))
DDR_VREF
DDR2 reference voltage (3)
DDR_ZP
DDR2 impedance control, connected via 200 Ω resistor to VSS
DDR_ZN
DDR2 impedance control, connected via 200 Ω resistor to
DVDDR2
DAC_VREF
DAC reference voltage input
DAC_RBIAS
DAC biasing, connected via 4 kΩ resistor to VSSA_1P8V
USB_VBUS
USB external charge pump input
0.475
VIH
V
DVDDR2
V
0.5
0.525
VSSA_1P8V
4.75
High-level input voltage, I/O, 3.3V
VSS
V
5
5.25
2
High-level input voltage, non-DDR I/O, 1.8V
V
0.8
Low-level input voltage, non-DDR I/O, 1.8V
V
V
0.65DVDD
Low-level input voltage, I/O, 3.3V
VIL
V
V
0.35DVDD
V
TC
Operating case temperature
Default
0
85
°C
FSYSCLK1
ARM Operating Frequency (SYSCLK1)
Default
10
270
MHz
(1)
(2)
(3)
74
This pin is an internal LDO output and connected via 1 µF capacitor to USB_VSSA1P2LDO.
Oscillator ground must be kept separate from other grounds and connected directly to the crystal load capacitor ground.
DDR_VREF is expected to equal 0.5DVDDR2 of the transmitting device and to track variations in the DVDDR2.
Device Operating Conditions
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
5.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating
Case Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
PARAMETER
VOH
VOL
II
(2)
TEST CONDITIONS
(1)
MIN
TYP
MAX
Low/full speed:
USB_DN and USB_DP
2.8
USB_VDDAP3
High speed:
USB_DN and USB_DP
360
440
UNIT
V
mV
High-level output voltage (3.3V I/O)
DVDD33 = MIN, IOH = MAX
2.4
V
High-level output voltage (1.8V I/O)
DVDD18 = MIN, IOH = MAX
DVDD - 0.45
V
Low/full speed:
USB_DN and USB_DP
0.0
0.3
V
High speed:
USB_DN and USB_DP
-10
10
mV
Low-level output voltage (3.3V I/O)
DVDD33 = MIN, IOL = MAX
0.4
V
Low-level output voltage (1.8V I/O)
DVDD18 = MIN, IOL = MAX
0.45
V
VI = VSS to DVDD without opposing
internal resistor
±10
µA
Input current
VI = VSS to DVDD with opposing internal
pullup resistor (3)
50
100
250
µA
VI = VSS to DVDD with opposing internal
pulldown resistor (3)
-250
-100
-50
µA
IOH
High-level output current
All peripherals
-4
mA
IOL
Low-level output current
All peripherals
4
mA
±20
µA
IOZ
(4)
I/O Off-state output current
VO = DVDD or VSS; internal pull disabled
VO = DVDD or VSS; internal pull enabled
±100
µA
ICDD
Core (CVDD, VDDA1P1V, VDDA1P2LDO (5))
supply current (6)
CVDD = 1.2 V, ARM clock = 270 MHz
TBD
mA
IDDD
3.3V I/O (DVDD33, USB_VDDA3P3) supply
current (6)
DVDD = 3.3 V, ARM clock = 270 MHz
TBD
mA
IDDD
1.8V I/O (DVDD18, DVDDR2, DDR_VDDDLL,
PLLVDD18, VDDA1P8V, USB_VDD1P8, MXVDD,
M24VDD) supply current (6)
DVDD = 1.8 V, ARM clock = 270 MHz
TBD
mA
CI
Input capacitance
4
pF
Co
Output capacitance
4
pF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
II applies to input-only pins and bi-directional pins. For input-only pins, II indicates the input leakage current. For bi-directional pins, II
indicates the input leakage current and off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
IOZ applies to output-only pins, indicating off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.
This pin is an internal LDO output and connected via 1 µF capacitor to USB_VSSA1P2LDO.
Measured under the following conditions: TBD. For more details on core and I/O activity, as well as information relevant to board power
supply design, see the TMS320DM357 Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRATBD).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Operating Conditions
75
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6 Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
6.1 Parameter Information
6.1.1
Parameter Information Device-Specific Information
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
Data Manual Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
4.0 pF
Device Pin
(see note)
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data manual provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect.
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the
data manual timings.
Input requirements in this data manual are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 6-1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
6.1.1.1
Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to Vref for both "0" and "1" logic levels. For 3.3 V I/O,
Vref = 1.5 V. For 1.8 V I/O, Vref = 0.9 V.
Vref
Figure 6-2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks,
VOLMAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX)
Figure 6-3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
76
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.1.1.2
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routings. As a
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be
adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer
information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS
models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing
Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as
buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.
For the DDR2 memory controller interface, it is not necessary to use the IBIS models to analyze timing
characteristics. TI provides a PCB routing rules solution that describes the routing rules to ensure the
DDR2 memory controller interface timings are met. See the Implementing DDR2 PCB Layout on the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Application Report (literature number SPRAAC5).
6.2 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals should transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a
monotonic manner.
6.3 Power Supplies
For more information regarding TI's power management products and suggested devices to power TI
devices, visit www.ti.com/dsppower.
6.3.1
Power-Supply Sequencing
The DM357 includes a core supply — CVDD, as well as three I/O supplies — DVDD18, DVDDR2, and DVDD33.
Once the CVDD supply has been powered up, the I/O supplies may be powered up. Table 6-1 and
Figure 6-4 show the power-on sequence timing requirements for the Core vs. I/O power-up. DVDDXX is
used to denote all I/O supplies.
Table 6-1. I/O Supply Power-On Timing Requirements (see Figure 6-4)
-270
NO.
1
td(CVDD-DVDD)
Delay time, CVDD supply ready to DVDDXX supply ramp start
MIN
MAX
0
100
UNIT
ms
CVDD
DVDDXX
(A)
Note A: DVDDXX denotes all I/O supplies.
Figure 6-4. I/O Supply Timings
There is not a specific power-up sequence that must be followed with respect to the order of the power-up
of the DVDD18, DVDDR2, and DVDD33 supplies. Once the CVDD supply is powered up and the td(CVDD-DVDDXX)
specification is met, the DVDD18, DVDDR2, and DVDD33 supplies may be powered up in any order of
preference. All other supplies may also be powered up in any order of preference once the td(CVDD-DVDDXX)
specification has been met.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
77
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.3.1.1 Power-Supply Design Considerations
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DM357 (or chip array) to minimize
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance
applications utilizing the DM357 device, the PC board should include separate power planes for core, I/O,
and ground, all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
6.3.1.2 Power-Supply Decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as
possible close to DM357. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total of 60 caps, 30 for the
core supplies and 30 for the I/O supplies. These caps need to be close to the DM357 power pins, no more
than 1.25 cm maximum distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better
because of their lower parasitic inductance. Proper capacitance values are also important. Small bypass
caps (near 560 pF) should be closest to the power pins. Medium bypass caps (220 nF or as large as can
be obtained in a small package) should be next closest. TI recommends no less than 8 small and
8 medium caps per supply be placed immediately next to the BGA vias, using the "interior" BGA space
and at least the corners of the "exterior".
Larger caps for each supply can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the order
of 100 µF) should be furthest away, but still as close as possible. Large caps for each supply should be
placed outside of the BGA footprint.
Any cap selection needs to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. As with the selection of
any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production lifetime should be
considered.
6.3.1.3 DM357 Power and Clock Domains
All of the DM357's modules lie within the "Always On" power domain. The "Always On" power domain is
always on when the chip is on. The "Always On" domain is powered by the VDD pins of the DM357.
Two primary reference clocks are required for the DM357 device. These can either be crystal input or
driven by external oscillators. A 27-MHz crystal is recommended for the system PLLs, which generate the
internal clocks for the ARM, coprocessors, peripherals (including imaging peripherals), and EDMA3. The
recommended 27-MHz input enables the use of the video DACs to drive NTSC/PAL television signals at
the proper frequencies. A 24-MHz crystal is also required if the USB peripheral is to be used. For further
description of the DM357 clock domains, see Table 6-3 and Figure 6-5.
78
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-2. DM357 Power and Clock Domains
POWER DOMAIN
CLOCK DOMAIN
Always On
CLKIN
UART0
PERIPHERAL/MODULE
Always On
CLKIN
UART1
Always On
CLKIN
UART2
Always On
CLKIN
I2C
Always On
CLKIN
Timer0
Always On
CLKIN
Timer1
Always On
CLKIN
Timer2
Always On
CLKIN
PWM0
Always On
CLKIN
PWM1
Always On
CLKIN
PWM2
Always On
CLKDIV2
ARM Subsystem
Always On
CLKDIV3
DDR2
Always On
CLKDIV3
VPSS
Always On
CLKDIV3
EDMA
Always On
CLKDIV3
SCR
Always On
CLKDIV6
GPSC
Always On
CLKDIV6
LPSCs
Always On
CLKDIV6
Ice Pick
Always On
CLKDIV6
EMIFA
Always On
CLKDIV6
USB
Always On
CLKDIV6
HPI
Always On
CLKDIV6
EMAC
Always On
CLKDIV6
MMC/SD/SDIO
Always On
CLKDIV6
SPI
Always On
CLKDIV6
ASP
Always On
CLKDIV6
GPIO
Table 6-3. DM357 Clock Domains (1)
SUBSYSTEM
FIXED RATIO vs. PLL1
CLOCK MODES (FREQUENCY)
PLL BYPASS
PLL ENABLED
PLL1
–
27 MHz
540 MHz
ARM
1:2
13.5 MHz
270 MHz
EDMA3/VPSS
1:3
9 MHz
180 MHz
Peripherals
1:6
4.5 MHz
90 MHz
(1)
These table values assume a MXI/CLKIN of 27 MHz and a PLL1 multiplier equal to 20.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
79
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
27 MHz
www.ti.com
Bypass Clock
PLLDIV1 (/1)
PLLDIV2 (/2)
UARTs (x3)
SYSCLK1
SYSCLK2
HMJCP
I2C
ARM Subsystem
PWMs (x3)
HMJCP
PLLDIV4 (/4)
PLLDIV5 (/6)
PLLDIV3 (/3)
PLL Controller 1
SYSCLK5
SYSCLK3
Timers (x3)
USB PHY
24 MHz
60 MHz
SCR
USB 2.0
EDMA
EMAC
VPFE
PCLK
VPBE
VPBECLK
EMIF/NAND
MMC/SD
DACs
SPI
PLLDIV1 (/1)
ASP
PLLDIV2 (/2)
BPDIV
PLL Controller 2
DDR2 PHY
DDR2 VTP
GPIO
HPI
DDR2 Mem Ctlr
ARM INTC
Figure 6-5. PLL1 and PLL2 Clock Domain Block Diagram
For further detail on PLL1 and PLL2, see the structure block diagrams Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7,
respectively.
80
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
CLKMODE
PLLEN
CLKIN
1
OSCIN
0
PLL
Post−DIV
PLLDIV1 (/1)
SYSCLK1
PLLDIV2 (/2)
SYSCLK2
PLLDIV3 (/3)
SYSCLK3
PLLDIV4 (/4)
SYSCLK4
PLLDIV5 (/6)
SYSCLK5
1
0
PLLM
AUXCLK
BPDIV
SYSCLKBP
Figure 6-6. PLL1 Structure Block Diagram
CLKMODE
PLLEN
CLKIN
1
PLL
OSCIN
0
Post−Div
(/1)
1
PLLDIV1
PLL2_SYSCLK1
(VPSS−VPBE)
0
PLLDIV2
PLL2_SYSCLK2
(DDR2 PHY)
PLLM
PLL2_SYSCLKBP
(DDR2 VTP)
BPDIV
Figure 6-7. PLL2 Structure Block Diagram
6.3.1.4 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) Module
The Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) controls DM357 device power by turning off unused power
domains or gating off clocks to individual peripherals/modules. The PSC consists of a Global PSC (GPSC)
and a set of Local PSCs (LPSCs). The GPSC contains memory mapped registers, power domain control,
PSC interrupt control, and a state machine for each peripheral/module. An LPSC is associated with each
peripheral/module and provides clock and reset control. The GPSC controls all of DM357’s LPSCs. The
ARM subsystem does not have an LPSC module. ARM sleep mode is accomplished through the wait for
interrupt instruction. The LPSCs for DM357 are shown in Table 6-4. The PSC register memory map is
given in Table 6-5. For more details on the PSC, see the Documentation Support section of the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC ARM Subsystem Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
81
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-4. DM357 LPSC Assignments
LPSC
NUMBER
PERIPHERAL/MODULE
LPSC
NUMBER
PERIPHERAL/MODULE
LPSC
NUMBER
0
VPSS DMA
1
VPSS MMR
2
3
4
EDMATC1
5
EMAC
6
PERIPHERAL/MODULE
14
EMIFA
28
TIMER1
15
MMC/SD/SDIO
29
Reserved
EDMACC
16
Reserved
30
Reserved
EDMATC0
17
ASP
31
Reserved
18
I2C
32
Reserved
19
UART0
33
Reserved
EMAC Memory Controller
20
UART1
34
Reserved
7
MDIO
21
UART2
35
Reserved
8
Reserved
22
SPI
36
Reserved
9
USB
23
PWM0
37
Reserved
10
Reserved
24
PWM1
38
Reserved
11
Reserved
25
PWM2
39
Reserved
12
HPI
26
GPIO
40
Reserved
13
DDR2 Memory Controller
27
TIMER0
Table 6-5. PSC Register Memory Map
82
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER
ACRONYM
0x01C4 1000
PID
0x01C4 1003 - 0x01C4 101F
-
0x01C4 1010
GBLCTL
DESCRIPTION
Peripheral Revision and Class Information Register
Reserved
Global Control Register
0x01C4 1014
-
0x01C4 1018
INTEVAL
0x01C4 101C - 0x01C4 103F
-
0x01C4 1040
MERRPR0
Module Error Pending 0 (mod 0 - 31) Register
0x01C4 1044
MERRPR1
Module Error Pending 1 (mod 32- 63) Register
0x01C4 1048 - 0x01C4 104F
-
0x01C4 1050
MERRCR0
Module Error Clear 0 (mod 0 - 31) Register
0x01C4 1054
MERRCR1
Module Error Clear 1 (mod 32 - 63) Register
0x01C4 1058 - 0x01C4 105F
-
0x01C4 1060
PERRPR
0x01C4 1064 - 0x01C4 1067
-
0x01C4 1068
PERRCR
0x01C4 106C - 0x01C4 106F
-
0x01C4 1070
EPCPR
0x01C4 1074 - 0x01C4 1077
-
0x01C4 1078
EPCCR
Reserved
Interrupt Evaluation Register
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power Error Pending Register
Reserved
Power Error Clear Register
Reserved
External Power Error Pending Register
Reserved
External Power Control Clear Register
0x01C4 107C - 0x01C4 10FF
-
0x01C4 1100
RAILSTAT
Power Rail Status Register
0x01C4 1104
RAILCTL
Power Rail Control Register
0x01C4 1108
RAILSEL
Power Rail Counter Select Register
0x01C4 110C - 0x01C4 111F
-
0x01C4 1120
PTCMD
0x01C4 1124 - 0x01C4 1127
-
0x01C4 1128
PTSTAT
0x01C4 112C - 0x01C4 11FF
-
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Reserved
Reserved
Power Domain Transition Command Register
Reserved
Power Domain Transition Status Register
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-5. PSC Register Memory Map (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER
ACRONYM
0x01C4 1200
PDSTAT0
DESCRIPTION
Power Domain Status 0 Register (Always On)
0x01C4 1204
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1208 - 0x01C4 12FF
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1300
PDCTL0
Power Domain Control 0 Register (Always On)
0x01C4 1304
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1308 - 0x01C4 150F
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1510
MCKOUT0
Module Clock Output Status (mod 0-31) Register
0x01C4 1514
MCKOUT1
Module Clock Output Status (mod 32-63) Register
0x01C4 1518 - 0x01C4 15FF
-
0x01C4 1600
MDCFG0
Reserved
Module Configuration 0 Register (VPSS DMA)
0x01C4 1604
MDCFG1
Module Configuration 1 Register (VPSS MMR)
0x01C4 1608
MDCFG2
Module Configuration 2 Register (EDMACC)
0x01C4 160C
MDCFG3
Module Configuration 3 Register (EDMATC0)
0x01C4 1610
MDCFG4
Module Configuration 4 Register (EDMATC1)
0x01C4 1614
MDCFG5
Module Configuration 5 Register (EMAC)
0x01C4 1618
MDCFG6
Module Configuration 6 Register (EMAC Memory Controller)
0x01C4 161C
MDCFG7
Module Configuration 7 Register (MDIO)
0x01C4 1620
-
0x01C4 1624
MDCFG9
0x01C4 1628
-
Reserved
0x01C4 162C
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1630
MDCFG12
Module Configuration 12 Register (HPI)
0x01C4 1634
MDCFG13
Module Configuration 13 Register (DDR2)
0x01C4 1638
MDCFG14
Module Configuration 14 Register (EMIFA)
0x01C4 163C
MDCFG15
Module Configuration 15 Register (MMC/SD/SDIO)
0x01C4 1640
Reserved
Module Configuration 9 Register (USB)
Reserved
0x01C4 1644
MDCFG17
Module Configuration 17 Register (ASP)
0x01C4 1648
MDCFG18
Module Configuration 18 Register (I2C)
0x01C4 164C
MDCFG19
Module Configuration 19 Register (UART0)
0x01C4 1650
MDCFG20
Module Configuration 20 Register (UART1)
0x01C4 1654
MDCFG21
Module Configuration 21 Register (UART2)
0x01C4 1658
MDCFG22
Module Configuration 22 Register (SPI)
0x01C4 165C
MDCFG23
Module Configuration 23 Register (PWM0)
0x01C4 1660
MDCFG24
Module Configuration 24 Register (PWM1)
0x01C4 1664
MDCFG25
Module Configuration 25 Register (PWM2)
0x01C4 1668
MDCFG26
Module Configuration 26 Register (GPIO)
0x01C4 166C
MDCFG27
Module Configuration 27 Register (TIMER0)
0x01C4 1670
MDCFG28
Module Configuration 28 Register (TIMER1)
0x01C4 1674 - 0x01C4 169B
-
Reserved
0x01C4 169C
-
Reserved
0x01C4 16A0
-
Reserved
0x01C4 16A4 - 0x01C4 17FF
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1800
MDSTAT0
Module Status 0 Register (VPSS DMA)
0x01C4 1804
MDSTAT1
Module Status 1 Register (VPSS MMR)
0x01C4 1808
MDSTAT2
Module Status 2 Register (EDMACC)
0x01C4 180C
MDSTAT3
Module Status 3 Register (EDMATC0)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
83
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-5. PSC Register Memory Map (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER
ACRONYM
0x01C4 1810
MDSTAT4
Module Status 4 Register (EDMATC1)
0x01C4 1814
MDSTAT5
Module Status 5 Register (EMAC)
0x01C4 1818
MDSTAT6
Module Status 6 Register (EMAC Memory Controller)
0x01C4 181C
MDSTAT7
Module Status 7 Register (MDIO)
0x01C4 1820
Reserved
0x01C4 1824
MDSTAT9
0x01C4 1828
-
Reserved
0x01C4 182C
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1830
MDSTAT12
Module Status 12 Register (HPI)
0x01C4 1834
MDSTAT13
Module Status 13 Register (DDR2)
0x01C4 1838
MDSTAT14
Module Status 14 Register (EMIFA)
0x01C4 183C
MDSTAT15
Module Status 15 Register (MMC/SD/SDIO)
0x01C4 1840
Module Status 9 Register (USB)
Reserved
0x01C4 1844
MDSTAT17
Module Status 17 Register (ASP)
0x01C4 1848
MDSTAT18
Module Status 18 Register (I2C)
0x01C4 184C
MDSTAT19
Module Status 19 Register (UART0)
0x01C4 1850
MDSTAT20
Module Status 20 Register (UART1)
0x01C4 1854
MDSTAT21
Module Status 21 Register (UART2)
0x01C4 1858
MDSTAT22
Module Status 22 Register (SPI)
0x01C4 185C
MDSTAT23
Module Status 23 Register (PWM0)
0x01C4 1860
MDSTAT24
Module Status 24 Register (PWM1)
0x01C4 1864
MDSTAT25
Module Status 25 Register (PWM2)
0x01C4 1868
MDSTAT26
Module Status 26 Register (GPIO)
0x01C4 186C
MDSTAT27
Module Status 27 Register (TIMER0)
Module Status 28 Register (TIMER1)
0x01C4 1870
MDSTAT28
0x01C4 1874 - 0x01C4 189B
-
Reserved
0x01C4 189C
-
Reserved
0x01C4 18A0
-
Reserved
0x01C4 18A4 - 0x01C4 19FF
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1A00
MDCTL0
Module Control 0 Register (VPSS DMA)
0x01C4 1A04
MDCTL1
Module Control 1 Register (VPSS MMR)
0x01C4 1A08
MDCTL2
Module Control 2 Register (EDMACC)
0x01C4 1A0C
MDCTL3
Module Control 3 Register (EDMATC0)
0x01C4 1A10
MDCTL4
Module Control 4 Register (EDMATC1)
0x01C4 1A14
MDCTL5
Module Control 5 Register (EMAC)
0x01C4 1A18
MDCTL6
Module Control 6 Register (EMAC Memory Controller)
0x01C4 1A1C
MDCTL7
Module Control 7 Register (MDIO)
0x01C4 1A20
Reserved
0x01C4 1A24
MDCTL9
0x01C4 1A28
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1A2C
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1A30
MDCTL12
Module Control 12 Register (HPI)
0x01C4 1A34
MDCTL13
Module Control 13 Register (DDR2)
0x01C4 1A38
MDCTL14
Module Control 14 Register (EMIFA)
0x01C4 1A3C
MDCTL15
Module Control 15 Register (MMC/SD/SDIO)
0x01C4 1A40
84
DESCRIPTION
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Module Control 9 Register (USB)
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-5. PSC Register Memory Map (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER
ACRONYM
0x01C4 1A44
MDCTL17
Module Control 17 Register (ASP)
DESCRIPTION
0x01C4 1A48
MDCTL18
Module Control 18 Register (I2C)
0x01C4 1A4C
MDCTL19
Module Control 19 Register (UART0)
0x01C4 1A50
MDCTL20
Module Control 20 Register (UART1)
0x01C4 1A54
MDCTL21
Module Control 21 Register (UART2)
0x01C4 1A58
MDCTL22
Module Control 22 Register (SPI)
0x01C4 1A5C
MDCTL23
Module Control 23 Register (PWM0)
0x01C4 1A60
MDCTL24
Module Control 24 Register (PWM1)
0x01C4 1A64
MDCTL25
Module Control 25 Register (PWM2)
0x01C4 1A68
MDCTL26
Module Control 26 Register (GPIO)
0x01C4 1A6C
MDCTL27
Module Control 27 Register (TIMER0)
Module Control 28 Register (TIMER1)
0x01C4 1A70
MDCTL28
0x01C4 1A74 - 0x01C4 1A9B
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1A9C
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1AA0
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1AA4 - 0x01C4 1FFF
-
Reserved
0x01C4 1000
MPFAR
Memory Protection Fault Address Register
0x01C4 1004
MPFSR
Memory Protection Fault Status Register
Memory Protection Fault Command Register
0x01C4 1008
MPFCR
0x01C4 100C
MPAA
0x01C4 1010 - 0x01C4 1FFF
-
Submit Documentation Feedback
Memory Protection Page Attribute Register
Reserved
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
85
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.4 Reset
DM357 supports various types of resets. Power-on-reset (POR), warm reset, max reset, system reset, and
module reset are summarized in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6. DM357 Resets
Type
Initiator
Description
Power-on-reset (POR)
RESET pin active low while TRST is low.
Global chip reset (Cold reset). Activates the POR signal
on chip, which is used to reset test and emulation logic.
Warm reset
RESET pin active low while TRST is high.
Resets everything except for test and emulation logic.
ARM emulator stays alive during warm reset.
Maximum reset
Emulator, WD Timer
Same as Warm reset, except for initiators.
Power-on-reset (POR) is the global chip reset and it affects test, emulation, and other circuitry. It is
invoked by driving the RESET pin active low while TRST is held low. A POR is required to place DM357
into a known good initial state. POR can be asserted prior to ramping the core and I/O voltages or after
the core and I/O voltages have reached their proper operating conditions. As a best practice, RESET
should be asserted (held low) during power-up. Prior to deasserting RESET (low-to-high transition), the
core and I/O voltages should be at their proper operating conditions and if an external 27 MHz oscillator is
used on the MXI/CLKIN pin, the external clock should also be running at the correct frequency.
Warm reset is activated by driving the RESET pin active low, while TRST is inactive high. This does not
reset test or ARM emulation logic. An ARM emulator session will stay alive during warm reset.
Maximum reset is initiated by the emulator or the watchdog timer and the reset effects are the same as a
warm reset. The emulator initiates a maximum reset via the ICEPICK module. When the watchdog timer
counter reaches zero, this will initiate a maximum reset to recover from a runaway condition. Both of the
maximum reset initiators can be masked by the ARM emulator.
System reset is initiated by the emulator and is a soft reset. Memory contents are maintained. Test,
emulation, clock, and power control logic are unaffected. The emulator initiates a system reset through
ICECRUSHER. The reset initiators are non-maskable resets.
For details on reset control/status registers, see the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide
(literature number SPRUG25)
For information on peripheral selection at the rising edge of RESET, see the Device Configuration section
of this data manual.
86
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.4.1
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Reset Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-7. Timing Requirements for Reset (see Figure 6-8)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tw(RST)
Width of the RESET pulse
444
ns
2
tsu(BOOT)
Setup time, boot configuration bits valid before RESET high
444
ns
3
th(BOOT)
Hold time, boot configuration bits valid after RESET high
444
ns
Table 6-8. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset (1)
(see Figure 6-8)
-270
NO.
MIN
26
td(PLL_LOCK)
Delay time, PLL1 lock time
4
td(RSTL-DDRZZ)
Delay time, RESET low to DDR2 Z Group high impedance
5
td(RSTL-DDRLL)
Delay time, RESET low to DDR2 Low Group low
6
td(RSTL-DDRHH)
16
MAX
UNIT
2000P
ns
0
2P + 20
ns
0
20
ns
Delay time, RESET low to DDR2 High Group high
0
20
ns
td(RSTL-DDRZHZ)
Delay time, RESET low to DDR2 Z/High Group high impedance
0
5P + 20
ns
17
td(RSTL-DDRLHL)
Delay time, RESET low to DDR2 Low/High Group low
0
20
ns
7
td(RSTL-ZZ)
Delay time, RESET low to Z Group high impedance
0
20
ns
8
td(RSTL-LOWL)
Delay time, RESET low to Low Group low
0
20
ns
9
td(RSTL-HIGHH)
Delay time, RESET low to High Group high
0
20
ns
18
td(RSTL-HIGHLOWH)
Delay time, RESET low to High/Low Group high
0
20
ns
19
td(RSTL-LOWHIGHL)
Delay time, RESET low to Low/High Group low
0
20
ns
24
td(RSTL-ZIZ)
Delay time, RESET low to Z/Invalid Group high impedance
0
20
ns
10
td(RSTH-DDRZV)
Delay time, RESET high to DDR2 Z Group valid
(2)
ns
11
td(RSTH-DDRLV)
Delay time, RESET high to DDR2 Low Group valid
(2)
ns
12
td(RSTH-DDRHV)
Delay time, RESET high to DDR2 High Group valid
(2)
ns
20
td(RSTH-DDRZHV)
Delay time, RESET high to DDR2 Z/High Group valid high
4000P
ns
21
td(RSTH-DDRLHV)
Delay time, RESET high to DDR2 Low/High Group valid high
4000P
ns
13
td(RSTH-ZV)
Delay time, RESET high to Z Group valid
(2)
ns
ns
14
td(RSTH-LOWV)
Delay time, RESET high to Low Group valid
(2)
15
td(RSTH-HIGHV)
Delay time, RESET high to High Group valid
(2)
ns
22
td(RSTH-HIGHLOWV)
Delay time, RESET high to High/Low Group valid low
5100P
ns
23
td(RSTH-LOWHIGHV)
Delay time, RESET high to Low/High Group valid high
5100P
ns
25
td(RSTH-ZIIV)
Delay time, RESET high to Z/Invalid Group invalid
4000P
ns
(1)
(2)
P = MXI/CLKIN cycle time, in ns.
Following RESET high, this signal group maintains the state the pins(s) achieved while RESET was driven low until the peripheral is
enabled via the PSC. For example, the DDR2 Z Group goes high impedance following RESET low and remains in the high-impedance
state following RESET high until the DDR2 controller is enabled via the PSC.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
87
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
1
RESET
2
3
Boot
Configuration Pins
4
10
5
11
6
12
16
20
17
21
7
13
8
14
9
15
18
22
19
23
24
25
DDR2 Z Group (A)
DDR2 Low Group (A)
DDR2 High Group (A)
DDR2 Z/High Group (A)
DDR2 Low/High Group (A)
Z Group (A)
Low Group (A)
High Group (A)
High/Low Group (A)
Low/High Group (A)
Z/Invalid Group (A)
A. DDR2 Z Group: DDR_DQS[3:0], DDR_D[12:0]
DDR2 Low Group: DDR_CLK0, DDR_CKE, DDR_A[12:0]
DDR2 High Group: DDR_CLK0, DDR_CS, DDR_WE, DDR_RAS, DDR_CAS
DDR2 Z/High Group: DDR_DQM[3:0],
DDR2 Low/High Group: DDR_BS[2:0]
Low Group: UART_RXD1, VCLK, RTCK, TDO, VPBECLK, YOUT0/G5/AEAW0, YOUT1/G6/AEAW1, YOUT2/G7/AEAW2,
YOUT3/R3/AEAW3, YOUT4/R4/AEAW4, COUT3/B6, COUT2/B5/EM_WIDTH, COUT1/B4/BTSEL1, COUT0/B3/BTSEL0,
TRST
High Group: UART_TXD1, EM_A[2]/(CLE), EM_A[1]/(ALE), EM_CS3, EM_WE/(WE)
Z Group: All other pins not listed above, with the exception of power and ground pins.
S The following Z Group pins have an internal pullup (IPU): UART_RXD1, VPBECLK, HSYNC, VSYNC,
YOUT0/G5/AEAW0, YOUT1/G6/AEAW1, YOUT2/G7/AEAW2, YOUT3/R3/AEAW3, YOUT4/R4/AEAW4, COUT3/B6,
COUT2/B5/EM_WIDTH, COUT1/B4/BTSEL1, COUT0/B3/BTSEL0, TRST, YI/CCD[7:0], CI[3:0]/CCD[11:8],
CI4/CCD12/UART_RTS2, CI5/CCD13/UART_CTS2, CI6/CCD14/UART_TXD2, CI7/CCD15/UART_RXD2
S The following Z Group pins have an internal pulldown (IPD): EM_WAIT, TCK, TDI, TMS, EMU[1:0]
High/Low Group: EM_BA[0]/DA0, EM_CS2, EM_OE/(RE)
Low/High Group: EM_R/W/INTRQ
Z/Invalid Group: EM_D[15:0]
Figure 6-8. Reset Timing
88
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.5 External Clock Input From MXI/CLKIN Pin
The DM357 device has two input pins for an external clock source, MXI/CLKIN and M24XI. The
MXI/CLKIN pin provides the clock source for PLL1 and PLL2 whose optimal frequency is 27 MHz. The
M24XI pin provides the clock source for the USB PLL whose optimal frequency is 24 MHz.
The DM357 device includes two options to provide an external clock input:
1. Use an on-chip oscillator with external crystal or ceramic resonator circuit (only supporting
parallel-resonant mode; it does not provide overtone support). For more details, see Section 6.5.1.
2. Use an external 1.8-V LVCMOS-compatible clock input. For more details, see Section 6.5.2.
6.5.1
Clock Input Option 1 – Crystal
6.5.1.1 27-MHz Crystal for System Oscillator
In this option, a crystal is used as the external clock input to the DM357 PLL1 and PLL2.
The 27-MHz oscillator provides the reference clock for all DM357 subsystems and peripherals. The
on-chip oscillator requires an external 27-MHz crystal connected across the MXI and MXO pins, along
with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 6-9. The external crystal load capacitors must be connected
only to the 27-MHz oscillator ground pin (MXVSS). Do not connect to board ground (VSS). The MXVDD pin
can be connected to the same 1.8 V power supply as DVDD18.
MXI/CLKIN
MXO
MXVSS
MXVDD
RBIAS
(optional)
Crystal
27 MHz
C1
C2
1.8 V
Figure 6-9. 27-MHz System Oscillator
The RBIAS resistor is optional. If the RBIAS resistor is used, it should equal 1 MΩ ±5%. The load
capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied (typical values are C1 = C2 =
10 pF). CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete components used
to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the associated oscillator pins
(MXI and MXO) and to the MXVSS pin.
C 1C 2
CL +
(C1 ) C2)
Table 6-9. Crystal Requirements for a 27-MHz System Oscillator
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 27 MHz)
Oscillation frequency
ESR
Frequency stability
Submit Documentation Feedback
MAX
UNIT
4
27
ms
MHz
60
Ω
±50
ppm
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
89
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.5.1.2 24-MHz Crystal for USB Oscillator
In this option, a crystal is used as the external clock input to the DM357 USB PLL.
The 24-MHz oscillator provides the reference clock for the DM357 USB peripheral. The on-chip oscillator
requires an external 24-MHz crystal connected across the M24XI and M24XO pins, along with two load
capacitors, as shown in Figure 6-10.The external crystal load capacitors must be connected only to the
24-MHz oscillator ground pin (M24VSS). Do not connect to board ground (VSS).
M24XI
M24XO
M24VSS
M24VDD
RBIAS
(optional)
Crystal
24 MHz
C1
C2
1.8 V
Figure 6-10. 24-MHz USB Oscillator
The RBIAS resistor is optional. If the RBIAS resistor is used, it should equal 1 MΩ ±5%. The load
capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied (typical values are C1 = C2 =
10 pF). CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete components used
to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the associated oscillator pins
(M24XI and M24XO) and to the M24XVSS pin.
C 1C 2
CL +
(C1 ) C2)
Table 6-10. Crystal Requirements for a 24-MHz USB Oscillator
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 24 MHz)
Oscillation frequency
ESR
Frequency stability
90
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
MAX
4
24
UNIT
ms
MHz
60
Ω
±50
ppm
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.5.2
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Clock Input Option 2 – 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input
In this option, a 1.8-V LVCMOS-compatible clock input is used as the external clock input to the DM357
device. The external connections are shown in Figure 6-11. The MXI/CLKIN pin is connected to the 1.8-V
LVCMOS-compatible clock source. The MXO pin is left unconnected. The MXVSS pin is connected to
board ground (VSS). The MXVDD pin can be connected to the same 1.8-V power supply as DVDD18. The
clock source must meet the MXI/CLKIN timing requirements shown in Table 6-15, Timing Requirements
for MXI/CLKIN.
MXI/CLKIN
MXO
MXVDD
MXVSS
NC
1.8 V
Figure 6-11. 1.8-V LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input
Figure 6-11 also applies to the USB external clock input. When a 1.8-V LVCMOS-compatible clock input is
used as the external clock input, the M24XI pin is connected to the 1.8-V LVCMOS-compatible clock
source. The M24XO pin is left unconnected. The M24VSS pin is connected to board ground (VSS). The
M24VDD pin can be connected to the same 1.8-V power supply as DVDDR2. The clock source must meet
the MXI/CLKIN timing requirements shown in Table 6-16, Timing Requirements for M24XI.
6.6 Clock PLLs
There are two independently controlled PLLs on DM357. PLL1 generates the frequencies required for the
ARM, DMA, VPFE, and other peripherals. PLL2 generates the frequencies required for the DDR2 interface
and the VPBE in certain modes. The recommended reference clock for both PLLs is the 27-MHz crystal
input. The USB2.0 PHY contains a third PLL embedded within it and the 24-MHz oscillator is its reference
clock source. This particular PLL is only usable for USB operation, and is discussed further in the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Univeral Serial Bus (USB) Controller User's Guide (literature number SPRUE35).
A summary of the PLL controller registers is shown in Table 6-11. For more details, see the
TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
Table 6-11. PLL and Reset Controller Registers Memory Map
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
PLL1 Controller Registers
0x01C4 0800
PID
Peripheral Identification and Revision Information Register
0x01C4 08E4
RSTYPE
0x01C4 0900
PLLC
PLL Controller 1 Operations Control Register
0x01C4 0910
PLLM
PLL Controller 1 Multiplier Control Register
0x01C4 0918
PLLDIV1
PLL Controller 1 Control-Divider 1 Register (SYSCLK1)
0x01C4 091C
PLLDIV2
PLL Controller 1 Control-Divider 2 Register (SYSCLK2)
0x01C4 0920
PLLDIV3
PLL Controller 1 Control-Divider 3 Register (SYSCLK3)
0x01C4 0928
POSTDIV
PLL Controller 1 Post-Divider Control Register
Reset Type Register
0x01C4 092C
BPDIV
0x01C4 0938
PLLCMD
PLL Controller 1 Command Register
0x01C4 093C
PLLSTAT
PLL Controller 1 Status Register (Shows PLLCTRL Status)
Submit Documentation Feedback
PLL Controller 1 Bypass Control-Divider Register (SYSCLKBP)
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
91
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-11. PLL and Reset Controller Registers Memory Map (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
0x01C4 0940
ALNCTL
0x01C4 0944
DCHANGE
DESCRIPTION
PLL Controller 1 Alignment Control Register
(Indicates Which SYSCLKs Need to be Aligned for Proper Device Operation)
PLL Controller 1 Divider Change Register
(Indicates if SYSCLK Divide Ratio has Been Modified)
0x01C4 0948
CKEN
0x01C4 094C
CKSTAT
PLL Controller 1 Clock Status Register (For All Clocks Except SYSCLKx)
SYSTAT
PLL Controller 1 System Clock Status 1 Register (Indicates SYSCLK on/off
Status)
0x01C4 0960
PLLDIV4
PLL Controller 1 Control-Divider 4 Register (SYSCLK4)
PLL Controller 1 Control-Divider 5 Register (SYSCLK5)
0x01C4 0950
PLL Controller 1 Clock Enable Register
0x01C4 0964
PLLDIV5
0x01C4 0C00
PID
0x01C4 0D00
PLLC
PLL Controller 2 Operations Control Register
0x01C4 0D10
PLLM
PLL Controller 2 Multiplier Control Register
0x01C4 0D18
PLLDIV1
PLL Controller 2 Control-Divider 1 Register (SYSCLK1)
0x01C4 0D1C
PLLDIV2
PLL Controller 2 Control-Divider 2 Register (SYSCLK2)
0x01C4 0D20 - 0x01C4 0D2B
POSTDIV
PLL Controller 2 Post-Divider Control Register
6.6.1
Peripheral Identification and Revision Information Register
0x01C4 0D2C
BPDIV
0x01C4 0D38
PLLCMD
PLL Controller 2 Bypass Control-Divider Register (SYSCLKBP)
PLL Controller 2 Command Register
0x01C4 0D3C
PLLSTAT
PLL Controller 2 Status Register (Shows PLLCTRL Status)
0x01C4 0D40
ALNCTL
PLL Controller 2 Alignment Control Register
(Indicates Which SYSCLKs Need to be Aligned for Proper Device Operation)
0x01C4 0D44
DCHANGE
PLL Controller 2 Divider Change Register
(Indicates if SYSCLK Divide Ratio has Been Modified)
0x01C4 0D48
CKEN
0x01C4 0D4C
CKSTAT
PLL Controller 2 Clock Enable Register
PLL Controller 2 Clock Status Register (For All Clocks Except SYSCLKx)
0x01C4 0D50
SYSTAT
PLL Controller 2 System Clock Status 1 Register (Indicates SYSCLK on/off
Status)
PLL1 and PLL2
Both PLL1 and PLL2 power is supplied externally via the 1.8 V PLL power-supply pin (PLLVDD18). It is
recommended that an external EMI filter circuit be added to PLLVDD18, as shown in Figure 6-12. The 1.8-V
supply of the EMI filter must be from the same 1.8-V power plane supplying the device’s 1.8-V I/O
power-supply pins (DVDD). TI recommends EMI filter manufacturer Murata, part number
NFM18CC222R1C3.
All PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter) should be placed as close to the device as
possible. For the best performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single
side of the board without jumpers, switches, or components other than the ones shown in Figure 6-12. For
reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components
(C1, C2, and the EMI Filter).
92
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
DM644x
PLL1
PLLVDD18
+1.8 V
EMI Filter
C1
C2
0.1 µF
0.01 µF
PLL2
Figure 6-12. PLL1 and PLL2 External Connection
The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements,
see Section 6.6.3, Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks).
There is an allowable range for PLL multiplier (PLLM). There is a minimum and maximum operating
frequency for MXI/CLKIN, PLLOUT, and the device clocks (SYSCLKs). The PLL Controllers must be
configured not to exceed any of these constraints documented in this section (certain combinations of
external clock inputs, internal dividers, and PLL multiply ratios might not be supported).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
93
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-12. PLLC1 Clock Frequency Ranges
CLOCK SIGNAL NAME
MXI/CLKIN (1)
PLLOUT
At 1.2-V CVDD
SYSCLK1 (CLKDIV1 Domain)
-270
(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
20
30
MHz
400
540
MHz
540
MHz
MXI/CLKIN input clock is used for both PLL Controllers (PLLC1 and PLLC2).
Table 6-13. PLLC2 Clock Frequency Ranges
CLOCK SIGNAL NAME
MXI/CLKIN (1)
PLLOUT
(1)
At 1.2-V CVDD
MIN
MAX
UNIT
20
30
MHz
400
900
MHz
MXI/CLKIN input clock is used for both PLL Controllers (PLLC1 and PLLC2).
Both PLL1 and PLL2 have stabilization, lock, and reset timing requirements that must be followed.
The PLL stabilization time is the amount of time that must be allotted for the internal PLL regulators to
become stable after the PLL is powered up (after PLLCTL.PLLPWRDN bit goes through a 1-to-0
transition). The PLL should not be operated until this stabilization time has expired. This stabilization step
must be applied after these resets—a Power-on Reset, a Warm Reset, or a Max Reset, as the
PLLCTL.PLLPWRDN bit resets to a "1". For the PLL stabliziation time value, see Table 6-14.
The PLL reset time is the amount of wait time needed for the PLL to properly reset (writing PLLRST = 0)
before bringing the PLL out of reset (writing PLLRST = 1). For the PLL reset time value, see Table 6-14.
The PLL lock time is the amount of time needed from when the PLL is taken out of reset (PLLRST = 1
with PLLEN = 0) to when to when the PLL controller can be switched to PLL mode (PLLEN = 1). For the
PLL lock time value, see Table 6-14.
Table 6-14. PLL1 and PLL2 Stabilization, Lock, and Reset Times
PLL STABILIZATION/LOCK/RESET TIME
PLL Stabilization Time
MIN
PLL Reset Time
MAX
128C
(1)
UNIT
µs
2000C (1)
PLL Lock Time
(1)
TYP
150
ns
ns
C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI/CLKIN frequency is 27 MHz, use C = 37.037 ns.
For details on the PLL initialization software sequence, see the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem
Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG25).
6.6.2
Clock PLL Considerations with External Clock Sources
If the internal oscillator is bypassed, to minimize the clock jitter a single clean power supply should power
both the DM357 device and the external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times
should also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements, see Section 6.6.3, Clock PLL Electrical
Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks).
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock
source must meet the device requirements in this data manual (see Section 5.3, Electrical Characteristics
Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Case Temperature and Section 6.6.3,
Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks).
94
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.6.3
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks)
Table 6-15. Timing Requirements for MXI/CLKIN (-270) Devices (1) (2) (3) (4) (see Figure 6-13)
-270
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
33.3
50
ns
1
tc(MXI)
Cycle time, MXI/CLKIN
2
tw(MXIH)
Pulse duration, MXI/CLKIN high
0.45C
0.55C
ns
3
tw(MXIL)
Pulse duration, MXI/CLKIN low
0.45C
0.55C
ns
4
tt(MXI)
Transition time, MXI/CLKIN
0.05C
ns
5
tJ(MXI)
Period jitter, MXI/CLKIN
0.02C
ns
The MXI/CLKIN frequency and PLL multiply factor should be chosen such that the resulting clock frequency is within the specific range
for CPU operating frequency. For example, for a -270 speed device with a 27 MHz CLKIN frequency, the PLL multiply factor should be
≤ 22.
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
For more details on the PLL multiplier factors, see the Documentation Support section for ARM Subsystem User's Guide.
C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI/CLKIN frequency is 27 MHz, use C = 37.037 ns.
1
5
4
2
MXI/CLKIN
3
4
Figure 6-13. MXI/CLKIN Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
95
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-16. Timing Requirements for M24XI (-270) Devices (1) (2) (3) (see Figure 6-14)
NO.
-270
UNIT
MIN
(1)
(2)
(3)
TYP
MAX
1
tc(M24XI)
Cycle time, M24XI
2
tw(M24XIH)
Pulse duration, M24XI high
0.45C
41.6
0.55C
ns
ns
3
tw(M24XIL)
Pulse duration, M24XI low
0.45C
0.55C
ns
4
tt(M24XI)
Transition time, M24XI
0.05C
ns
5
tJ(M24XI)
Period jitter, M24XI
0.02C
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
For more details on the PLL, see the Documentation Support section for USB Peripheral Reference Guide.
C = M24XI cycle time in ns. For example, when M24XI frequency is 24 MHz, use C = 41.6 ns.
1
5
4
2
MXI/CLKIN
3
4
Figure 6-14. M24XI Timing
96
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-17. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLK_OUT0 (1) (2)
(see Figure 6-15)
NO.
(1)
(2)
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tC
Cycle time, CLK_OUT0
37.037
74.074
ns
2
tw(CLKOUT0H)
Pulse duration, CLK_OUT0 high
0.45P
0.55P
ns
3
tw(CLKOUT0L)
Pulse duration, CLK_OUT0 low
0.45P
0.55P
ns
4
tt(CLKOUT0)
Transition time, CLK_OUT0
0.05P
ns
5
td(CLKINH-CLKO0H)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLK_OUT0 high
(divide-by-1 only)
1
8
ns
6
td(CLKINL-CLKO0L)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI low to CLK_OUT0 low
(divide-by-1 only)
1
8
ns
7
td(CLKINH-CLKO0L)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLK_OUT0 low
(divide-by-2 only)
1
8
ns
8
td(CLKINH-CLKO0H)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLK_OUT0 high
(divide-by-2 only)
1
8
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
P = 1/CLK_OUT0 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLK_OUT0 frequency is 27 MHz, use P = 37.04 ns.
5
6
8
7
CLKIN/MXI
2
4
1
CLK_OUT0
(Divide-by-1)
3
4
CLK_OUT0
(Divide-by-2)
Figure 6-15. CLK_OUT0 Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
97
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-18. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLK_OUT1 (1) (2)
(see Figure 6-16)
NO.
(1)
(2)
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tC
Cycle time, CLK_OUT1
41.667
83.33
2
tw(CLKOUT1H)
Pulse duration, CLK_OUT1 high
0.45P
0.55P
ns
3
tw(CLKOUT1L)
Pulse duration, CLK_OUT1 low
0.45P
0.55P
ns
4
tt(CLKOUT1)
Transition time, CLK_OUT1
0.05P
ns
5
td(CLKINH-CLKO1H)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLK_OUT1 high
(divide-by-1 only)
1
8
ns
6
td(CLKINL-CLKO1L)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI low to CLK_OUT1 low
(divide-by-1 only)
1
8
ns
7
td(CLKINH-CLKO1L)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLK_OUT1 low
(divide-by-2 only)
1
8
ns
8
td(CLKINH-CLKO1H)
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLK_OUT1 high
(divide-by-2 only)
1
8
ns
The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
P = 1/CLK_OUT1 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLK_OUT1 frequency is 24 MHz, use P = 41.6 ns.
5
6
8
7
CLKIN/MXI
2
4
1
CLK_OUT1
(Divide-by-1)
3
4
CLK_OUT1
(Divide-by-2)
Figure 6-16. CLK_OUT1 Timing
98
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.7 Interrupts
The DM357 device has a large number of interrupts to service the needs of its many peripherals and
subsystems. All of the device interrupts are routed to the ARM interrupt controller. The interrupts can be
selectively enabled or disabled in either of the controllers.
6.7.1
ARM CPU Interrupts
The ARM9 CPU core supports 2 direct interrupts: FIQ and IRQ. The DM357 ARM interrupt controller
prioritizes up to 64 interrupt requests from various peripherals and subsystems, which are listed in
Table 6-19, and interrupts the ARM CPU. Each interrupt is programmable for up to 8 levels of priority.
There are 6 levels for IRQ and 2 levels for FIQ. Interrupts at the same priority level are serviced in order
by the ARM Interrupt Number, with the lowest number having the highest priority. Table 6-20 shows the
ARM interrupt controller registers and memory locations. For more details on ARM interrupt control, see
the Documentation Support section of the TMS320DM357 ARM Subsystem Reference Guide (literature
number SPRUG25).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
99
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-19. DM357 ARM Interrupts
ARM
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
ACRONYM
0
VDINT0
1
VDINT1
2
100
ARM
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
ACRONYM
VPSS CCDC 0
32
TINT0
Timer 0 – TINT12
VPSS CCDC 1
33
TINT1
Timer 0 – TINT34
VDINT2
VPSS CCDC 2
34
TINT2
Timer 1 – TINT12
3
HISTINT
VPSS Histogram
35
TINT3
Timer 1 – TINT34
4
H3AINT
VPSS AE/AWB/AF
36
PWMINT0
PWM 0
5
PRVUINT
VPSS Previewer
37
PWMINT1
PWM 1
6
RSZINT
VPSS Resizer
38
PWMINT2
PWM 2
7
-
Reserved
39
I2CINT
8
VENCINT
VPSS VPBE
40
UARTINT0
UART 0
SOURCE
SOURCE
I2C
9
-
Reserved
41
UARTINT1
UART 1
10
-
Reserved
42
UARTINT2
UART 2
11
-
Reserved
43
SPINT0
SPI
12
-
Reserved
44
SPINT1
SPI
13
EMACINT
EMAC Memory Controller
45
-
Reserved
14
-
Reserved
46
-
Reserved
15
-
Reserved
47
-
Reserved
EDMA CC Region 0
48
GPIO0
GPIO 0
EDMA CC Error
49
GPIO1
GPIO 1
16
EDMA3CC_INT0
17
EDMA3CC_ERRINT
18
EDMA3TC_ERRINT0 EDMA TC 0 Error
50
GPIO2
GPIO 2
19
EDMA3TC_ERRINT1 EDMA TC 1 Error
51
GPIO3
GPIO 3
PSC ALLINT
52
GPIO4
GPIO 4
-
Reserved
53
GPIO5
GPIO 5
-
Reserved
54
GPIO6
GPIO 6
GPIO 7
20
PSCINT
21
22
23
HPINT
HPI
55
GPIO7
24
ASPXINT
ASP Transmit
56
GPIOBNK0
GPIO Bank 0
25
ASPRINT
ASP Receive
57
GPIOBNK1
GPIO Bank 1
26
MMCINT
MMC
58
GPIOBNK2
GPIO Bank 2
27
SDIOINT
SD
59
GPIOBNK3
GPIO Bank 3
28
-
Reserved
60
GPIOBNK4
GPIO Bank 4
DDR2 Memory Controller
61
COMMTX
ARMSS
EMIFA
62
COMMRX
ARMSS
Reserved
63
EMUINT
29
DDRINT
30
EMIFAINT
31
-
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
E2ICE
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-20. ARM Interrupt Controller Registers
HEX ADDRESS
0x01C4 8000
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
FIQ0
FIQ Interrupt Status 0 [Interrupt Status of INT[31:0] (If Mapped to FIQ)]
0x01C4 8004
FIQ1
FIQ Interrupt Status 1 [Interrupt Status of INT[63:32] (If Mapped to FIQ)]
0x01C4 8008
IRQ0
IRQ Interrupt Status 0 [Interrupt Status of INT[31:0] (If Mapped to IRQ)]
0x01C4 800C
IRQ1
IRQ Interrupt Status 1 [Interrupt Status of INT[63:32] (If Mapped to IRQ)]
0x01C4 8010
FIQENTRY
Entry Address [28:0] for Valid FIQ Interrupt
0x01C4 8014
IRQENTRY
Entry Address [28:0] for Valid IRQ Interrupt
0x01C4 8018
EINT0
Interrupt Enable Register 0
0x01C4 801C
EINT1
Interrupt Enable Register 1
0x01C4 8020
INCTL
Interrupt Operation Control Register
0x01C4 8024
EABASE
0x01C4 8028 - 0x01C4 802F
-
Interrupt Entry Table Base Address Register
Reserved
0x01C4 8030
INTPRI0
Interrupt 0-7 Priority Select
0x01C4 8034
INTPRI1
Interrupt 8-15 Priority Select
0x01C4 8038
INTPRI2
Interrupt 16-23 Priority Select
0x01C4 803C
INTPRI3
Interrupt 24-31 Priority Select
0x01C4 8040
INTPRI4
Interrupt 32-39 Priority Select
0x01C4 8044
INTPRI5
Interrupt 40-47 Priority Select
0x01C4 8048
INTPRI6
Interrupt 48-55 Priority Select
0x01C4 804C
INTPRI7
Interrupt 56-63 Priority Select
0x01C4 8050 - 0x01C4 83FF
Submit Documentation Feedback
-
Reserved
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
101
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.8 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
When configured as an output, a write to an internal register can control the state driven on the output pin.
When configured as an input, the state of the input is detectable by reading the state of an internal
register. In addition, the GPIO peripheral can produce CPU interrupts and EDMA events in different
interrupt/event generation modes. The GPIO peripheral provides generic connections to external devices.
The GPIO pins are grouped into banks of 16 pins per bank (i.e., bank 0 consists of GPIO [0:15]).
The DM357 GPIO peripheral supports the following:
• Up to 54 1.8v GPIO pins, GPIO[0:53]
• Up to 17 3.3v GPIO pins, GPIO3V[0:16] (GPIO[54:70])
• Interrupts:
– Up to 8 unique GPIO[0:7] interrupts from Bank 0
– 5 GPIO bank (aggregated) interrupt signals from each of the 5 banks of GPIOs
– Interrupts can be triggered by rising and/or falling edge, specified for each interrupt capable GPIO
signal
• DMA events:
– Up to 8 unique GPIO DMA events from Bank 0
– 5 GPIO bank (aggregated) DMA event signals from each of the 5 banks of GPIOs
• Set/clear functionality: Firmware writes 1 to corresponding bit position(s) to set or to clear GPIO
signal(s). This allows multiple firmware processes to toggle GPIO output signals without critical section
protection (disable interrupts, program GPIO, re-enable interrupts, to prevent context switching to
anther process during GPIO programming).
• Separate Input/Output registers
• Output register in addition to set/clear so that, if preferred by firmware, some GPIO output signals can
be toggled by direct write to the output register(s).
• Output register, when read, reflects output drive status. This, in addition to the input register reflecting
pin status and open-drain I/O cell, allows wired logic be implemented.
The memory map for the GPIO registers is shown in Table 6-21. For more detailed information on GPIOs,
see the Documentation Support section for the General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide.
102
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.8.1
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
GPIO Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-21. GPIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C6 7000
PID
0x01C6 7004
-
0x01C6 7008
BINTEN
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral Identification Register
Reserved
GPIO interrupt per-bank enable
GPIO Banks 0 and 1
0x01C6 700C
-
0x01C6 7010
DIR01
Reserved
0x01C6 7014
OUT_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Output Data Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 7018
SET_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Set Data Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 701C
CLR_DATA01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Clear data for banks 0 and 1 (GPIO[0:31])
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Direction Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 7020
IN_DATA01
0x01C6 7024
SET_RIS_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Input Data Register (GPIO[0:31])
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 7028
CLR_RIS_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 702C
SET_FAL_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 7030
CLR_FAL_TRIG01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[0:31])
0x01C6 7034
INSTAT01
GPIO Banks 0 and 1 Interrupt Status Register (GPIO[0:31])
GPIO Banks 2 and 3
0x01C6 7038
DIR23
0x01C6 703C
OUT_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Direction Register (GPIO[32:63])
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Output Data Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 7040
SET_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Set Data Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 7044
CLR_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Clear Data Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 7048
IN_DATA23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Input Data Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 704C
SET_RIS_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 7050
CLR_RIS_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 7054
SET_FAL_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 7058
CLR_FAL_TRIG23
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[32:63])
0x01C6 705C
INSTAT23
0x01C6 7060
DIR4
0x01C6 7064
OUT_DATA4
GPIO Bank 4 Output Data Register (GPIO[64:70])
GPIO Banks 2 and 3 Interrupt Status Register (GPIO[32:63])
GPIO Bank 4
GPIO Bank 4 Direction Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 7068
SET_DATA4
GPIO Bank 4 Set Data Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 706C
CLR_DATA4
GPIO Bank 4 Clear Data Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 7070
IN_DATA4
GPIO Bank 4 Input Data Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 7074
SET_RIS_TRIG4
GPIO Bank 4 Set Rising Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 7078
CLR_RIS_TRIG4
GPIO Bank 4 Clear Rising Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 707C
SET_FAL_TRIG4
GPIO Bank 4 Set Falling Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 7080
CLR_FAL_TRIG4
GPIO Bank 4 Clear Falling Edge Interrupt Register (GPIO[64:70])
0x01C6 7084
INSTAT4
0x01C6 7088 - 0x01C6 7FFF
-
Submit Documentation Feedback
GPIO Bank 4 Interrupt Status Register (GPIO[64:70])
Reserved
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
103
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.8.2
www.ti.com
GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-22. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (1) (see Figure 6-17)
-270
NO.
1
2
(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tw(GPIH)
Pulse duration, GPIx high
52
ns
tw(GPIL)
Pulse duration, GPIx low
52
ns
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have DM357 recognize
the GPIx changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to allow DM357 enough time to
access the GPIO register through the internal bus.
Table 6-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs
(see Figure 6-17)
NO.
3
4
(1)
-270
PARAMETER
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
MIN
Pulse duration, GPOx high
Pulse duration, GPOx low
MAX
UNIT
26 (1)
ns
(1)
ns
26
This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the
GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 6-17. GPIO Port Timing
6.8.3
GPIO Peripheral External Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-24. Timing Requirements for External Interrupts (1) (see Figure 6-18)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tw(ILOW)
Width of the external interrupt pulse low
52
ns
2
tw(IHIGH)
Width of the external interrupt pulse high
52
ns
(1)
The pulse width given is sufficient to generate an interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have DM357 recognize the
GPIO changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIO duration must be extended to allow DM357 enough time to
access the GPIO register through the internal bus.
2
1
EXT_INTx
Figure 6-18. GPIO External Interrupt Timing
104
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.9 Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller
The EDMA controller handles all data transfers between memories and the device slave peripherals on
the DM357 device. These data transfers include cache servicing, non-cacheable memory accesses,
user-programmed data transfers, and host accesses. These are summarized as follows:
• Transfer to/from on-chip memories
– Coprocessor shared memory
– ARM program/data RAM
• Transfer to/from external storage
– DDR2 SDRAM
– NAND flash
– Asynchronous EMIF
– Smart Media, SD, MMC, xD media storage
• Transfer to/from peripherals/hosts
– HPI
– ASP
– SPI
– PWM
– UART
The EDMA controller supports two addressing modes: constant addressing mode and increment
addressing mode. On the DM357 device, constant addressing mode is not supported by any peripheral or
internal memory. For more information on these two addressing modes, see the TMS320DM357 DMSoC
Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller User's Guide (literature number SPRUG34).
6.9.1
EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
The EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and external memory.
Table 6-25 lists the source of EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the programmable
EDMA channels. For the DM357 device, the association of an event to a channel is fixed; each of the
EDMA channels has one specific event associated with it. These specific events are captured in the
EDMA event registers (ER, ERH) even if the events are disabled by the EDMA event enable registers
(EER, EERH). For more detailed information on the EDMA module and how EDMA events are enabled,
captured, processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the Document Support section of the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller User's Guide (literature
number SPRUG34).
Table 6-25. DM357 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events (1)
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
EVENT DESCRIPTION
XEVT
ASP Transmit Event
0-1
2
(1)
Reserved
3
REVT
ASP Receive Event
4
HISTEVT
VPSS Histogram Event
5
H3AEVT
VPSS H3A Event
6
PRVUEVT
VPSS Previewer Event
7
RSZEVT
VPSS Resizer Event
8
Reserved
9
Reserved
10
Reserved
In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or alternate
transfer completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the Document Support section of the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller User's Guide (literature number SPRUG34).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
105
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-25. DM357 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events (continued)
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
11
Reserved
12-15
Reserved
16
SPIXEVT
SPI Transmit Event
17
SPIREVT
SPI Receive Event
18
URXEVT0
UART 0 Receive Event
19
UTXEVT0
UART 0 Transmit Event
20
URXEVT1
UART 1 Receive Event
21
UTXEVT1
UART 1 Transmit Event
22
URXEVT2
UART 2 Receive Event
23
UTXEVT2
UART 2 Transmit Event
24
Reserved
25
Reserved
26
MMCRXEVT
MMC Receive Event
27
MMCTXEVT
MMC Transmit Event
28
I2CREVT
I2C Receive Event
29
I2CXEVT
I2C Transmit Event
32
GPINT0
GPIO 0 Interrupt
33
GPINT1
GPIO 1 Interrupt
34
GPINT2
GPIO 2 Interrupt
35
GPINT3
GPIO 3 Interrupt
36
GPINT4
GPIO 4 Interrupt
37
GPINT5
GPIO 5 Interrupt
38
GPINT6
GPIO 6 Interrupt
30-31
Reserved
39
GPINT7
GPIO 7 Interrupt
40
GPBNKINT0
GPIO Bank 0 Interrupt
41
GPBNKINT1
GPIO Bank 1 Interrupt
42
GPBNKINT2
GPIO Bank 2 Interrupt
43
GPBNKINT3
GPIO Bank 3 Interrupt
44
GPBNKINT4
GPIO Bank 4 Interrupt
45-47
Reserved
48
TINT0
Timer 0 Interrupt
49
TINT1
Timer 1 Interrupt
50
TINT2
Timer 2 Interrupt
51
TINT3
Timer 3 Interrupt
52
PWM0
PWM 0 Event
53
PWM1
PWM 1 Event
54
PWM2
PWM 2 Event
55-63
106
EVENT DESCRIPTION
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.9.2
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
EDMA Peripheral Register Descriptions
Table 6-26 lists the EDMA registers, their corresponding acronyms, and DM357 device memory locations.
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
Channel Controller Registers
0x01c0 0000 - 0x01c0 0003
0x01c0 0004
Reserved
CCCFG
0x01c0 0008 - 0x01c0 01FF
EDMA3CC Configuration Register
Reserved
Global Registers
0x01c0 0200
QCHMAP0
QDMA Channel 0 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 0204
QCHMAP1
QDMA Channel 1 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 0208
QCHMAP2
QDMA Channel 2 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 020C
QCHMAP3
QDMA Channel 3 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 0210
QCHMAP4
QDMA Channel 4 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 0214
QCHMAP5
QDMA Channel 5 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 0218
QCHMAP6
QDMA Channel 6 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 021C
QCHMAP7
QDMA Channel 7 Mapping to PaRAM Register
0x01c0 0240
DMAQNUM0
DMA Queue Number Register 0 (Channels 00 to 07)
0x01c0 0244
DMAQNUM1
DMA Queue Number Register 1 (Channels 08 to 15)
0x01c0 0248
DMAQNUM2
DMA Queue Number Register 2 (Channels 16 to 23)
0x01c0 024C
DMAQNUM3
DMA Queue Number Register 3 (Channels 24 to 31)
0x01c0 0250
DMAQNUM4
DMA Queue Number Register 4 (Channels 32 to 39)
0x01c0 0254
DMAQNUM5
DMA Queue Number Register 5 (Channels 40 to 47)
0x01c0 0258
DMAQNUM6
DMA Queue Number Register 6 (Channels 48 to 55)
0x01c0 025C
DMAQNUM7
DMA Queue Number Register 7 (Channels 56 to 63)
0x01c0 0260
QDMAQNUM
CC QDMA Queue Number
0x01c0 0264 - 0x01c0 0283
–
0x01c0 0284
QUEPRI
Reserved
Queue Priority Register
0x01c0 0288 - 0x01c0 02FF
–
0x01c0 0300
EMR
Reserved
0x01c0 0304
EMRH
Event Missed Register High
Event Missed Clear Register
Event Missed Register
0x01c0 0308
EMCR
0x01c0 030C
EMCRH
0x01c0 0310
QEMR
0x01c0 0314
QEMCR
QDMA Event Missed Clear Register
0x01c0 0318
CCERR
EDMA3CC Error Register
0x01c0 031C
CCERRCLR
0x01c0 0320
EEVAL
Error Evaluate Register
0x01c0 0340
DRAE0
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 0
0x01c0 0344
DRAEH0
0x01c0 0348
DRAE1
0x01c0 034C
DRAEH1
0x01c0 0350
DRAE2
0x01c0 0354
DRAEH2
0x01c0 0358
DRAE3
0x01c0 035C
DRAEH3
0x01c0 0360 - 0x01c0 037C
–
0x01c0 0380
QRAE0
Submit Documentation Feedback
Event Missed Clear Register High
QDMA Event Missed Register
EDMA3CC Error Clear Register
DMA Region Access Enable Register High for Region 0
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 1
DMA Region Access Enable Register High for Region 1
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 2
DMA Region Access Enable Register High for Region 2
DMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 3
DMA Region Access Enable Register High for Region 3
Reserved
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 0
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
107
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c0 0384
QRAE1
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 1
0x01c0 0388
QRAE2
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 2
QDMA Region Access Enable Register for Region 3
0x01c0 038C
QRAE3
0x01c0 0390 - 0x01c0 039C
–
0x01c0 0400
Q0E0
Event Q0 Entry 0 Register
0x01c0 0404
Q0E1
Event Q0 Entry 1 Register
0x01c0 0408
Q0E2
Event Q0 Entry 2 Register
0x01c0 040C
Q0E3
Event Q0 Entry 3 Register
0x01c0 0410
Q0E4
Event Q0 Entry 4 Register
0x01c0 0414
Q0E5
Event Q0 Entry 5 Register
0x01c0 0418
Q0E6
Event Q0 Entry 6 Register
0x01c0 041C
Q0E7
Event Q0 Entry 7 Register
0x01c0 0420
Q0E8
Event Q0 Entry 8 Register
0x01c0 0424
Q0E9
Event Q0 Entry 9 Register
0x01c0 0428
Q0E10
Event Q0 Entry 10 Register
0x01c0 042C
Q0E11
Event Q0 Entry 11 Register
0x01c0 0430
Q0E12
Event Q0 Entry 12 Register
0x01c0 0434
Q0E13
Event Q0 Entry 13 Register
0x01c0 0438
Q0E14
Event Q0 Entry 14 Register
0x01c0 043C
Q0E15
Event Q0 Entry 15 Register
0x01c0 0440
Q1E0
Event Q1 Entry 0 Register
0x01c0 0444
Q1E1
Event Q1 Entry 1 Register
Reserved
0x01c0 0448
Q1E2
Event Q1 Entry 2 Register
0x01c0 044C
Q1E3
Event Q1 Entry 3 Register
0x01c0 0450
Q1E4
Event Q1 Entry 4 Register
0x01c0 0454
Q1E5
Event Q1 Entry 5 Register
0x01c0 0458
Q1E6
Event Q1 Entry 6 Register
0x01c0 045C
Q1E7
Event Q1 Entry 7 Register
0x01c0 0460
Q1E8
Event Q1 Entry 8 Register
0x01c0 0464
Q1E9
Event Q1 Entry 9 Register
0x01c0 0468
Q1E10
Event Q1 Entry 10 Register
0x01c0 046C
Q1E11
Event Q1 Entry 11 Register
0x01c0 0470
Q1E12
Event Q1 Entry 12 Register
0x01c0 0474
Q1E13
Event Q1 Entry 13 Register
0x01c0 0478
Q1E14
Event Q1 Entry 14 Register
0x01c0 047C
Q1E15
Event Q1 Entry 15 Register
0x01c0 0480 - 0x01c0 05FF
Reserved
0x01c0 0600
QSTAT0
Queue 0 Status Register
0x01c0 0604
QSTAT1
Queue 1 Status Register
0x01c0 0608 - 0x01c0 061F
Reserved
0x01c0 0620
QWMTHRA
0x01c0 0624
–
0x01c0 0640
CCSTAT
0x01c0 0644 - 0x01c0 0FFF
108
REGISTER NAME
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Queue Watermark Threshold A Register for Q[3:0]
Reserved
EDMA3CC Status Register
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
Global Channel Registers
0x01c0 1000
ER
Event Register
0x01c0 1004
ERH
Event Register High
0x01c0 1008
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01c0 100C
ECRH
Event Clear Register High
0x01c0 1010
ESR
0x01c0 1014
ESRH
Event Set Register
Event Set Register High
0x01c0 1018
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01c0 101C
CERH
Chained Event Register High
0x01c0 1020
EER
0x01c0 1024
EERH
Event Enable Register
Event Enable Register High
0x01c0 1028
EECR
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 102C
EECRH
0x01c0 1030
EESR
0x01c0 1034
EESRH
Event Enable Clear Register High
Event Enable Set Register
Event Enable Set Register High
0x01c0 1038
SER
0x01c0 103C
SERH
Secondary Event Register High
0x01c0 1040
SECR
Secondary Event Clear Register
0x01c0 1044
SECRH
0x01c0 1048 - 0x01c0 104F
Secondary Event Register
Secondary Event Clear Register High
Reserved
0x01c0 1050
IER
0x01c0 1054
IERH
Interrupt Enable Register High
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 1058
IECR
0x01c0 105C
IECRH
0x01c0 1060
IESR
0x01c0 1064
IESRH
0x01c0 1068
IPR
0x01c0 106C
IPRH
0x01c0 1070
ICR
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Clear Register High
Interrupt Enable Set Register
Interrupt Enable Set Register High
Interrupt Pending Register
Interrupt Pending Register High
Interrupt Clear Register
0x01c0 1074
ICRH
Interrupt Clear Register High
0x01c0 1078
IEVAL
Interrupt Evaluate Register
0x01c0 1080
QER
QDMA Event Register
0x01c0 1084
QEER
0x01c0 1088
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 108C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01c0 1090
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01c0 1094
QSECR
0x01c0 1098 - 0x01c0 1FFF
QDMA Event Enable Register
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Reserved
Shadow Region 0 Channel Registers
0x01c0 2000
ER
0x01c0 2004
ERH
Event Register High
0x01c0 2008
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01c0 200C
ECRH
0x01c0 2010
ESR
0x01c0 2014
ESRH
Event Set Register High
0x01c0 2018
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01c0 201C
CERH
Submit Documentation Feedback
Event Register
Event Clear Register High
Event Set Register
Chained Event Register High
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
109
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c0 2020
EER
REGISTER NAME
0x01c0 2024
EERH
Event Enable Register High
Event Enable Clear Register
Event Enable Register
0x01c0 2028
EECR
0x01c0 202C
EECRH
0x01c0 2030
EESR
0x01c0 2034
EESRH
0x01c0 2038
SER
0x01c0 203C
SERH
Secondary Event Register High
0x01c0 2040
SECR
Secondary Event Clear Register
Event Enable Clear Register High
Event Enable Set Register
Event Enable Set Register High
Secondary Event Register
0x01c0 2044
SECRH
0x01c0 2048 - 0x01c0 204C
-
0x01c0 2050
IER
0x01c0 2054
IERH
Interrupt Enable Register High
0x01c0 2058
IECR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 205C
IECRH
0x01c0 2060
IESR
0x01c0 2064
IESRH
0x01c0 2068
IPR
0x01c0 206C
IPRH
Secondary Event Clear Register High
Reserved
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Clear Register High
Interrupt Enable Set Register
Interrupt Enable Set Register High
Interrupt Pending Register
Interrupt Pending Register High
0x01c0 2070
ICR
0x01c0 2074
ICRH
Interrupt Clear Register High
0x01c0 2078
IEVAL
Interrupt Evaluate Register
0x01c0 207C
-
0x01c0 2080
QER
0x01c0 2084
QEER
Interrupt Clear Register
Reserved
QDMA Event Register
QDMA Event Enable Register
0x01c0 2088
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 208C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01c0 2090
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01c0 2094
QSECR
0x01c0 2098 - 0x01c0 21FC
-
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Reserved
Shadow Region 1 Channel Registers
110
0x01c0 2200
ER
Event Register
0x01c0 2204
ERH
Event Register High
0x01c0 2208
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01c0 220C
ECRH
Event Clear Register High
0x01c0 2210
ESR
0x01c0 2214
ESRH
Event Set Register
Event Set Register High
0x01c0 2218
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01c0 221C
CERH
Chained Event Register High
0x01c0 2220
EER
0x01c0 2224
EERH
Event Enable Register High
0x01c0 2228
EECR
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 222C
EECRH
0x01c0 2230
EESR
0x01c0 2234
EESRH
0x01c0 2238
SER
0x01c0 223C
SERH
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Event Enable Register
Event Enable Clear Register High
Event Enable Set Register
Event Enable Set Register High
Secondary Event Register
Secondary Event Register High
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c0 2240
SECR
0x01c0 2244
SECRH
REGISTER NAME
Secondary Event Clear Register
Secondary Event Clear Register High
0x01c0 2248 - 0x01c0 224C
-
0x01c0 2250
IER
0x01c0 2254
IERH
Interrupt Enable Register High
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 2258
IECR
0x01c0 225C
IECRH
0x01c0 2260
IESR
0x01c0 2264
IESRH
0x01c0 2268
IPR
0x01c0 226C
IPRH
0x01c0 2270
ICR
Reserved
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Clear Register High
Interrupt Enable Set Register
Interrupt Enable Set Register High
Interrupt Pending Register
Interrupt Pending Register High
Interrupt Clear Register
0x01c0 2274
ICRH
Interrupt Clear Register High
0x01c0 2278
IEVAL
Interrupt Evaluate Register
0x01c0 227C
-
Reserved
0x01c0 2280
QER
0x01c0 2284
QEER
QDMA Event Register
0x01c0 2288
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 228C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01c0 2290
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01c0 2294
QSECR
0x01c0 2298 - 0x01c0 23FC
-
QDMA Event Enable Register
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Reserved
Shadow Region 2 Channel Registers
0x01c0 2400
ER
0x01c0 2404
ERH
Event Register
Event Register High
Event Clear Register
0x01c0 2408
ECR
0x01c0 240C
ECRH
0x01c0 2410
ESR
0x01c0 2414
ESRH
Event Set Register High
Chained Event Register
Event Clear Register High
Event Set Register
0x01c0 2418
CER
0x01c0 241C
CERH
0x01c0 2420
EER
0x01c0 2424
EERH
Event Enable Register High
0x01c0 2428
EECR
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 242C
EECRH
Chained Event Register High
Event Enable Register
Event Enable Clear Register High
0x01c0 2430
EESR
0x01c0 2434
EESRH
Event Enable Set Register
0x01c0 2438
SER
0x01c0 243C
SERH
Secondary Event Register High
0x01c0 2440
SECR
Secondary Event Clear Register
0x01c0 2444
SECRH
0x01c0 2448 - 0x01c0 244C
-
Event Enable Set Register High
Secondary Event Register
Secondary Event Clear Register High
Reserved
0x01c0 2450
IER
0x01c0 2454
IERH
Interrupt Enable Register High
0x01c0 2458
IECR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 245C
IECRH
0x01c0 2460
IESR
Submit Documentation Feedback
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Clear Register High
Interrupt Enable Set Register
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
111
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c0 2464
IESRH
0x01c0 2468
IPR
0x01c0 246C
IPRH
0x01c0 2470
ICR
0x01c0 2474
ICRH
Interrupt Clear Register High
Interrupt Evaluate Register
0x01c0 2478
IEVAL
0x01c0 247C
-
0x01c0 2480
QER
0x01c0 2484
QEER
REGISTER NAME
Interrupt Enable Set Register High
Interrupt Pending Register
Interrupt Pending Register High
Interrupt Clear Register
Reserved
QDMA Event Register
QDMA Event Enable Register
0x01c0 2488
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 248C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01c0 2490
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01c0 2494
QSECR
0x01c0 2498 - 0x01c0 25FC
-
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
Reserved
Shadow Region 3 Channel Registers
112
0x01c0 2600
ER
0x01c0 2604
ERH
Event Register
Event Register High
0x01c0 2608
ECR
Event Clear Register
0x01c0 260C
ECRH
Event Clear Register High
0x01c0 2610
ESR
0x01c0 2614
ESRH
Event Set Register High
0x01c0 2618
CER
Chained Event Register
0x01c0 261C
CERH
0x01c0 2620
EER
0x01c0 2624
EERH
Event Enable Register High
Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 2628
EECR
0x01c0 262C
EECRH
0x01c0 2630
EESR
0x01c0 2634
EESRH
Event Set Register
Chained Event Register High
Event Enable Register
Event Enable Clear Register High
Event Enable Set Register
Event Enable Set Register High
0x01c0 2638
SER
0x01c0 263C
SERH
Secondary Event Register
Secondary Event Register High
0x01c0 2640
SECR
Secondary Event Clear Register
0x01c0 2644
SECRH
0x01c0 2648 - 0x01c0 264C
-
Secondary Event Clear Register High
0x01c0 2650
IER
0x01c0 2654
IERH
Interrupt Enable Register High
0x01c0 2658
IECR
Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 265C
IECRH
0x01c0 2660
IESR
0x01c0 2664
IESRH
0x01c0 2668
IPR
0x01c0 266C
IPRH
Reserved
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Clear Register High
Interrupt Enable Set Register
Interrupt Enable Set Register High
Interrupt Pending Register
Interrupt Pending Register High
0x01c0 2670
ICR
0x01c0 2674
ICRH
Interrupt Clear Register High
0x01c0 2678
IEVAL
Interrupt Evaluate Register
0x01c0 267C
-
0x01c0 2680
QER
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Interrupt Clear Register
Reserved
QDMA Event Register
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c0 2684
QEER
REGISTER NAME
0x01c0 2688
QEECR
QDMA Event Enable Clear Register
0x01c0 268C
QEESR
QDMA Event Enable Set Register
0x01c0 2690
QSER
QDMA Secondary Event Register
0x01c0 2694
QSECR
0x01c0 2698 - 0x01c0 27FC
-
Reserved
0x01c0 2800 - 0x01c0 29FC
-
Reserved
0x01c0 2A00 - 0x01c0 2BFC
-
Reserved
0x01c0 2C00 - 0x01c0 2DFC
-
Reserved
QDMA Event Enable Register
QDMA Secondary Event Clear Register
0x01c0 2E00 - 0x01c0 2FFC
-
Reserved
0x01c0 2FFD - 0x01c0 3FFF
-
Reserved
0x01c0 4000 - 0x01c0 4FFF
-
Parameter Set RAM (see Table 6-27)
0x01c0 5000 - 0x01c0 7FFF
-
Reserved
0x01c0 8000 - 0x01c0 FFFF
-
Reserved
Transfer Controller 0 Registers
0x01c1 0000
-
0x01c1 0004
TCCFG
0x01c1 0008 - 0x01c1 00FF
-
0x01c1 0100
TCSTAT
Reserved
EDMA3 TC0 Configuration Register
Reserved
EDMA3 TC0 Channel Status Register
0x01c1 0104 - 0x01c1 0110
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0114 - 0x01c1 011F
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0120
ERRSTAT
EDMA3 TC0 Error Status Register
0x01c1 0124
ERREN
EDMA3 TC0 Error Enable Register
0x01c1 0128
ERRCLR
EDMA3 TC0 Error Clear Register
0x01c1 012C
ERRDET
EDMA3 TC0 Error Details Register
EDMA3 TC0 Error Interrupt Command Register
0x01c1 0130
ERRCMD
0x01c1 0134 - 0x01c1 013F
-
0x01c1 0140
RDRATE
0x01c1 0144 - 0x01c1 01FF
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0200 - 0x01c1 023F
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0240
SAOPT
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Options Register
0x01c1 0244
SASRC
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Source Address Register
Reserved
EDMA3 TC0 Read Rate Register
0x01c1 0248
SACNT
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Count Register
0x01c1 024C
SADST
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Destination Address Register
0x01c1 0250
SABIDX
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Source B-Index Register
0x01c1 0254
SAMPPRXY
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Memory Protection Proxy Register
0x01c1 0258
SACNTRLD
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Count Reload Register
0x01c1 025C
SASRCBREF
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Source Address B-Reference Register
0x01c1 0260
SADSTBREF
EDMA3 TC0 Source Active Destination Address B-Reference Register
0x01c1 0264 - 0x01c1 027F
-
0x01c1 0280
DFCNTRLD
Reserved
0x01c1 0284
DFSRCBREF
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Set Source Address B-Reference Register
0x01c1 0288
DFDSTBREF
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Set Destination Address B-Reference
Register
0x01c1 028C - 0x01c1 02FF
-
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Set Count Reload Register
Reserved
0x01c1 0300
DFOPT0
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Options Register 0
0x01c1 0304
DFSRC0
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 0
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
113
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c1 0308
DFCNT0
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Count Register 0
REGISTER NAME
0x01c1 030C
DFDST0
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 0
0x01c1 0310
DFBIDX0
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 0
0x01c1 0314
DFMPPRXY0
0x01c1 0318 - 0x01c1 033F
-
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 0
Reserved
0x01c1 0340
DFOPT1
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Options Register 1
0x01c1 0344
DFSRC1
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 1
0x01c1 0348
DFCNT1
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Count Register 1
0x01c1 034C
DFDST1
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 1
0x01c1 0350
DFBIDX1
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 1
0x01c1 0354
DFMPPRXY1
0x01c1 0358 - 0x01c1 037F
-
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 1
Reserved
0x01c1 0380
DFOPT2
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Options Register 2
0x01c1 0384
DFSRC2
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 2
0x01c1 0388
DFCNT2
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Count Register 2
0x01c1 038C
DFDST2
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 2
0x01c1 0390
DFBIDX2
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 2
0x01c1 0394
DFMPPRXY2
0x01c1 0398 - 0x01c1 03BF
-
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 2
Reserved
0x01c1 03C0
DFOPT3
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Options Register 3
0x01c1 03C4
DFSRC3
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 3
0x01c1 03C8
DFCNT3
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Count Register 3
0x01c1 03CC
DFDST3
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 3
0x01c1 03D0
DFBIDX3
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 3
0x01c1 03D4
DFMPPRXY3
0x01c1 03D8 - 0x01c1 03FF
-
EDMA3 TC0 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 3
Reserved
Transfer Controller 1 Registers
114
0x01c1 0400
-
0x01c1 0404
TCCFG
Reserved
EDMA3 TC1 Configuration Register
0x01c1 0408 - 0x01c1 04FF
-
0x01c1 0500
TCSTAT
Reserved
0x01c1 0504 - 0x01c1 0510
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0514 - 0x01c1 051F
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0520
ERRSTAT
EDMA3 TC1 Error Status Register
0x01c1 0524
ERREN
EDMA3 TC1 Error Enable Register
EDMA3 TC1 Channel Status Register
0x01c1 0528
ERRCLR
EDMA3 TC1 Error Clear Register
0x01c1 052C
ERRDET
EDMA3 TC1 Error Details Register
0x01c1 0530
ERRCMD
EDMA3 TC1 Error Interrupt Command Register
0x01c1 0534 - 0x01c1 053F
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0540
RDRATE
0x01c1 0544 - 0x01c1 05FF
-
EDMA3 TC1 Read Rate Register
Reserved
0x01c1 0600 - 0x01c1 063F
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0640
SAOPT
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Options Register
0x01c1 0644
SASRC
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Source Address Register
0x01c1 0648
SACNT
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Count Register
0x01c1 064C
SADST
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Destination Address Register
0x01c1 0650
SABIDX
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Source B-Index Register
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-26. DM357 EDMA Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS
ACRONYM
0x01c1 0654
SAMPPRXY
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Memory Protection Proxy Register
REGISTER NAME
0x01c1 0658
SACNTRLD
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Count Reload Register
0x01c1 065C
SASRCBREF
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Source Address B-Reference Register
0x01c1 0660
SADSTBREF
EDMA3 TC1 Source Active Destination Address B-Reference Register
0x01c1 0664 - 0x01c1 067F
-
Reserved
0x01c1 0680
DFCNTRLD
0x01c1 0684
DFSRCBREF
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Set Count Reload Register
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Set Source Address B-Reference Register
0x01c1 0688
DFDSTBREF
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Set Destination Address B-Reference
Register
0x01c1 068C - 0x01c1 06FF
-
0x01c1 0700
DFOPT0
Reserved
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Options Register 0
0x01c1 0704
DFSRC0
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 0
0x01c1 0708
DFCNT0
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Count Register 0
0x01c1 070C
DFDST0
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 0
0x01c1 0710
DFBIDX0
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 0
0x01c1 0714
DFMPPRXY0
0x01c1 0718 - 0x01c1 073F
-
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 0
0x01c1 0740
DFOPT1
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Options Register 1
0x01c1 0744
DFSRC1
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 1
Reserved
0x01c1 0748
DFCNT1
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Count Register 1
0x01c1 074C
DFDST1
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 1
0x01c1 0750
DFBIDX1
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 1
0x01c1 0754
DFMPPRXY1
0x01c1 0758 - 0x01c1 077F
-
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 1
0x01c1 0780
DFOPT2
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Options Register 2
0x01c1 0784
DFSRC2
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 2
0x01c1 0788
DFCNT2
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Count Register 2
0x01c1 078C
DFDST2
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 2
0x01c1 0790
DFBIDX2
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 2
Reserved
0x01c1 0794
DFMPPRXY2
0x01c1 0798 - 0x01c1 07BF
-
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 2
0x01c1 07C0
DFOPT3
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Options Register 3
0x01c1 07C4
DFSRC3
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Source Address Register 3
0x01c1 07C8
DFCNT3
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Count Register 3
0x01c1 07CC
DFDST3
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Destination Address Register 3
0x01c1 07D0
DFBIDX3
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO BIDX Register 3
0x01c1 07D4
DFMPPRXY3
0x01c1 07D8 - 0x01c1 07FF
-
Reserved
EDMA3 TC1 Destination FIFO Memory Protection Proxy Register 3
Reserved
Table 6-27 shows an abbreviation of the set of registers which make up the parameter set for each of 128
EDMA events. Each of the parameter register sets consist of 8 32-bit word entries. Table 6-28 shows the
parameter set entry registers with relative memory address locations within each of the parameter sets.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
115
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-27. EDMA Parameter Set RAM
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
DESCRIPTION
0x01c0 4000 - 0x01c0 401F
Parameters Set 0 (8 32-bit words)
0x01c0 4020 - 0x01c0 403F
Parameters Set 1 (8 32-bit words)
0x01c0 4040 - 0x01c0 405F
Parameters Set 2 (8 32-bit words)
0x01c0 4060 - 0x01c0 407F
Parameters Set 3 (8 32-bit words)
0x01c0 4080 - 0x01c0 409F
Parameters Set 4 (8 32-bit words)
0x01c0 40A0 - 0x01c0 40BF
Parameters Set 5 (8 32-bit words)
...
...
0x01c0 4FC0 - 0x01c0 4FDF
Parameters Set 126 (8 32-bit words)
0x01c0 4FE0 - 0x01c0 4FFF
Parameters Set 127 (8 32-bit words)
Table 6-28. Parameter Set Entries
HEX OFFSET ADDRESS
WITHIN THE PARAMETER SET
116
ACRONYM
PARAMETER ENTRY
0x0000
OPT
Option
0x0004
SRC
Source Address
0x0008
A_B_CNT
0x000C
DST
0x0010
SRC_DST_BIDX
Source B Index, Destination B Index
0x0014
LINK_BCNTRLD
Link Address, B Count Reload
0x0018
SRC_DST_CIDX
Source C Index, Destination C Index
0x001C
CCNT
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
A Count, B Count
Destination Address
C Count
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.10 External Memory Interface (EMIF)
DM357 supports several memory and external device interfaces, including:
• Asynchronous EMIF (EMIFA) for interfacing to NOR Flash, SRAM, etc.
• NAND Flash
6.10.1 Asynchronous EMIF (EMIFA)
The DM357 Asynchronous EMIF (EMIFA) provides an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus, an address bus width up to
24-bits, and 4 dedicated chip selects, along with memory control signals. These signals are multiplexed
between three peripherals:
• EMIFA and NAND interfaces
• Host Port Interface
6.10.1.1 NAND (NAND, SmartMedia, xD)
The EMIFA interface provides both the asynchronous EMIF and NAND interfaces. Four chip selects are
provided and each are individually configurable to provide either EMIFA or NAND support. The NAND
features supported are as follows.
• NAND flash on up to 4 asynchronous chip selects.
• 8 and 16-bit data bus widths.
• Programmable cycle timings.
• Performs ECC calculation.
• NAND Mode also supports SmartMedia/SSFDC (Solid State Floppy Disk Controller) and xD memory
cards
• ARM ROM supports booting of the DM357 ARM processor from NAND flash located at CS2
The memory map for EMIFA and NAND registers is shown in Table 6-29. For more details on the EMIFA
and NAND interfaces, see the TMS320DM357 DMSoC Asynchronous External Memory Interface (EMIF)
User's Guide (literature number SPRUG33).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
117
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-29. EMIFA/NAND Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01E0 0000 - 0x01E0 0003
0x01E0 0004
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
AWCCR
0x01E0 0008 - 0x01E0 000F
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register
Reserved
0x01E0 0010
A1CR
Asynchronous 1 Configuration Register (CS2 Space)
0x01E0 0014
A2CR
Asynchronous 2 Configuration Register (CS3 Space)
0x01E0 0018
A3CR
Asynchronous 3 Configuration Register (CS4 Space)
0x01E0 001C
A4CR
Asynchronous 4 Configuration Register (CS5 Space)
0x01E0 0020 - 0x01E0 003F
-
Reserved
0x01E0 0040
EIRR
EMIF Interrupt Raw Register
0x01E0 0044
EIMR
EMIF Interrupt Mask Register
0x01E0 0048
EIMSR
EMIF Interrupt Mask Set Register
0x01E0 004C
EIMCR
EMIF Interrupt Mask Clear Register
0x01E0 0050 - 0x01E0 005F
0x01E0 0060
-
Reserved
NANDFCR
NAND Flash Control Register
0x01E0 0064
NANDFSR
NAND Flash Status Register
0x01E0 0070
NANDF1ECC
NAND Flash 1 ECC Register (CS2 Space)
0x01E0 0074
NANDF2ECC
NAND Flash 2 ECC Register (CS3 Space)
0x01E0 0078
NANDF3ECC
NAND Flash 3 ECC Register (CS4 Space)
0x01E0 007C
NANDF4ECC
NAND Flash 4 ECC Register (CS5 Space)
0x01E0 0080 - 0x01E0 0FFF
118
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
-
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.10.1.2
EMIFA Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-30. Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module (1)
(see Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
READS and WRITES
2
tw(EM_WAIT)
Pulse duration, EM_WAIT assertion and deassertion
2E
ns
12
tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high
13
th(EMOEH-EMDIV)
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high
10.5
ns
0
ns
(2)
4E + 10.4
ns
Setup time, EM_WAIT asserted before EM_WE high (2)
4E + 10.4
ns
READS
14
tsu(EMWAIT-EMOEH)
Setup time, EM_WAIT asserted before EM_OE high
WRITES
28
(1)
(2)
tsu(EMWAIT-EMWEH)
E = SYSCLK5 period in ns for EMIFA. For example, when SYSCLK1 is 540 MHz, use E = 11.11 ns.
Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAIT must be asserted to add extended
wait states. Figure 6-21 and Figure 6-22 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.
Table 6-31. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module (1) (2) (see Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20)
NO.
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
MAX
READS and WRITES
1
td(TURNAROUND)
Turn around time
(TA + 1) * E - 2
(TA + 1) * E + 2
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)
(RS + RST + RH +
TA + 4) * E - 0.5
(RS + RST + RH + TA +
4) * E + 0.5
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)
(RS + RST + RH +
TA + 4) * E - 0.5
4184 * E + 0.5
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS
= 0)
(RS + 1) * E - 1
(RS + 1) * E + 1.4
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS
= 1)
-1
READS
3
4
5
tc(EMRCYCLE)
tsu(EMCSL-EMOEL)
th(EMOEH-EMCSH)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high
(SS = 0)
(RH + 1) * E - 2.1
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high
(SS = 1)
-2.2
ns
(RH + 1) * E + 1.4
ns
ns
6
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low
(RS + 1) * E - 1.8
(RS + 1) * E + 1.3
ns
7
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid
(RH + 1) * E - 2.3
(RH + 1) * E + 1.1
ns
8
tsu(EMAV-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_A[21:0] valid to EM_OE low
(RS + 1) * E - 1.9
(RS + 1) * E + 1.5
ns
9
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[21:0] invalid
(RH + 1) * E - 2.6
(RH + 1) * E + 1.2
ns
10
tw(EMOEL)
EM_OE active low width (EW = 0)
(RST + 1) * E - 2
(RST + 1) * E + 2
ns
EM_OE active low width (EW = 1)
(RST + 1) * E - 2
(RST + 4097) * E + 2
ns
11
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)
4E + 10.4
ns
Delay time from EM_WAIT deasserted to EM_OE high
WRITES
(1)
(2)
RS = Read setup, RST = Read STrobe, RH = Read Hold, WS = Write Setup, WST = Write STrobe, WH = Write Hold, TA = Turn
Around, EW = Extend Wait mode, SS = Select Strobe mode. These parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Bank and
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers and support the following range of values: TA[3:0], RS[15:0], RST[63:0], RH[7:0],
WS[15:0], WST[63:0], WH[7:0], and EW[255:0]. For more information, see the TMS320DM357 DMSoC Asynchronous External Memory
Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUG33).
E = SYSCLK5 period in ns for EMIFA. For example, when SYSCLK1 is 540 MHz, use E = 11.11 ns.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
119
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-31. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module (see Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20) (continued)
NO.
15
16
17
PARAMETER
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)
UNIT
MAX
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)
(WS + WST + WH
+ TA + 4) * E - 0.5
(WS + WST + WH + TA
+ 4) * E + 0.5
ns
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)
(WS + WST + WH
+ TA + 4) * E -0.5
4184 * E + 0.5
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low
(SS = 0)
(WS + 1) * E - 0.9
(WS + 1) * E + 1.4
ns
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low
(SS = 1)
-1
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high
(SS = 0)
(WH + 1) * E - 2.1
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high
(SS = 1)
-2.1
tc(EMWCYCLE)
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)
-270
MIN
ns
(WH + 1) * E + 1.1
ns
ns
18
tsu(EMRNW-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_R/W valid to EM_WE low
(WS + 1) * E - 0.7
(WS + 1) * E + 0.9
ns
19
th(EMWEH-EMRNW)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_R/W invalid
(WH + 1) * E - 0.9
(WH + 1) * E + 0.9
ns
20
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS + 1) * E - 1.7
(WS + 1) * E + 1.5
ns
21
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid
(WH + 1) * E - 2.3
(WH + 1) * E + 0.9
ns
22
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_A[21:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS + 1) * E - 1.8
(WS + 1) * E + 1.7
ns
23
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[21:0] invalid
(WH + 1) * E - 2.6
(WH + 1) * E + 1
ns
EM_WE active low width (EW = 0)
(WST + 1) * E - 2
(WST + 1) * E + 2
ns
EM_WE active low width (EW = 1)
(WST + 1) * E - 2
(WST + 4097) * E + 2
24
tw(EMWEL)
25
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)
Delay time from EM_WAIT deasserted to EM_WE high
4E + 10.4
ns
26
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low
(WS + 1) * E - 2.2
(WS + 1) * E + 1.4
ns
27
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid
(WH + 1) * E - 2.2
(WH + 1) * E + 1.4
ns
120
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
SETUP
STROBE
HOLD
3
1
EM_CS[5:2]
EM_R/W
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[21:0]
4
8
5
9
6
7
10
EM_OE
13
12
EM_D[15:0]
EM_WE
Figure 6-19. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIF
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
121
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
SETUP
STROBE
HOLD
15
1
EM_CS[5:2]
EM_R/W
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[21:0]
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
22
23
EM_WE
27
26
EM_D[15:0]
EM_OE
Figure 6-20. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIF
EM_CS[5:2]
SETUP
STROBE
Extended Due to EM_WAIT
STROBE
HOLD
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[21:0]
EM_D[15:0]
14
11
EM_OE
2
Asserted
EM_WAIT
2
Deasserted
Figure 6-21. EM_WAIT Read Timing Requirements
122
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
EM_CS[5:2]
SETUP
STROBE
Extended Due to EM_WAIT
STROBE
HOLD
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[21:0]
EM_D[15:0]
28
25
EM_WE
2
EM_WAIT
2
Asserted
Deasserted
Figure 6-22. EM_WAIT Write Timing Requirements
6.10.2 DDR2 Memory Controller
The DDR2 Memory Controller is a dedicated interface to DDR2 SDRAM. It supports JESD79D-2A
standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM Devices and can interface to either 16-bit or 32-bit DDR2 SDRAM
devices. For details on the DDR2 Memory Controller, see Section 2.8.3, Document Support for the link to
the TMS320DM357 DMSoC DDR2 Memory Controller User's Guide (literature number SPRUG38).
The DDR2 SDRAM plays a key role in a device system and demands a significant amount of high-speed
external memory for:
• Buffering of input image data from sensors or video sources
• Intermediate buffering for processing/resizing of image data in the VPFE
• Numerous OSD display buffers
• Intermediate buffering for large raw Bayer data image files while performing image processing
functions
• Buffering for intermediate data while performing video encode and decode functions
• Storage of executable code for the ARM
A memory map of the DDR2 Memory Controller registers is shown in Table 6-32.
Table 6-32. DDR2 Memory Controller Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C4 004C
DDRVTPER
0x01C4 2030
DDRVTPR
0x2000 0000 - 0x2000 0003
-
REGISTER NAME
DDR2 VTP Enable Register
DDR2 VTP Register
Reserved
0x2000 0004
SDRSTAT
0x2000 0008
SDBCR
SDRAM Bank Configuration Register
0x2000 000C
SDRCR
SDRAM Refresh Control Register
0x2000 0010
SDTIMR
SDRAM Timing Register
0x2000 0014
SDTIMR2
SDRAM Timing Register 2
0x2000 0020
PBBPR
0x2000 0024 - 0x2000 00BF
-
SDRAM Status Register
Peripheral Bus Burst Priority Register
Reserved
0x2000 00C0
IRR
Interrupt Raw Register
0x2000 00C4
IMR
Interrupt Masked Register
0x2000 00C8
IMSR
Interrupt Mask Set Register
0x2000 00CC
IMCR
Interrupt Mask Clear Register
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
123
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-32. DDR2 Memory Controller Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x2000 00D0 - 0x2000 00E3
-
0x2000 00E4
DDRPHYCR
0x2000 00E8 - 0x2000 00EF
-
0x2000 00F0
-
DDR PHY Control Register
Reserved
VTPIOCR
0x2000 00F4 - 0x2000 7FFF
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
VTP IO Control Register
Reserved
6.10.2.1 DDR2 Memory Controller Electrical Data/Timing
The Implementing DDR2 PCB Layout on the DM357 DMSoC Application Report (literature number TBD)
specifies a complete DDR2 interface solution for the DM357 as well as a list of compatible DDR2 devices.
TI has performed the simulation and system characterization to ensure all DDR2 interface timings in this
solution are met.
TI only supports board designs that follow the guidelines outlined in the Implementing DDR2 PCB Layout
on the DM357 DMSoC application report (literature number TBD).
Table 6-33. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DDR2 Memory
Controller (1) (2)(see Figure 6-23)
NO.
1
(1)
(2)
-270
PARAMETER
tc(DDR_CLK0)
Cycle time, DDR_CLK0
MIN
MAX
6
8
UNIT
ns
DDR_CLK0 cycle time = 2 x PLL2 - SYSCLK2 cycle time.
The PLL2 Controller must be programmed such that the resulting DDR_CLK0 clock frequency is within the specified range.
1
DDR_CLK0
Figure 6-23. DDR2 Memory Controller Clock Timing
124
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.11 MMC/SD/SDIO
The DM357 MMC/SD/SDIO Controller has following features:
• MultiMediaCard (MMC).
• Secure Digital (SD) memory card with Secure Data I/O (SDIO).
• MMC/SD/SDIO protocol support.
• Programmable clock frequency.
• 256 bit Read/Write FIFO to lower system overhead.
• Slave DMA transfer capability.
The MMC/SD/SDIO register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-34.
6.11.1 MMC/SD/SDIO Peripheral Description(s)
Table 6-34. MMC/SD/SDIO Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01E1 0000
MMCCTL
MMC Control Register
0x01E1 0004
MMCCLK
MMC Memory Clock Control Register
0x01E1 0008
MMCST0
MMC Status Register 0
0x01E1 000C
MMCST1
MMC Status Register 1
0x01E1 0010
MMCIM
MMC Interrupt Mask Register
0x01E1 0014
MMCTOR
MMC Response Time-Out Register
0x01E1 0018
MMCTOD
MMC Data Read Time-Out Register
0x01E1 001C
MMCBLEN
MMC Block Length Register
0x01E1 0020
MMCNBLK
MMC Number of Blocks Register
0x01E1 0024
MMCNBLC
MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register
0x01E1 0028
MMCDRR
MMC Data Receive Register
0x01E1 002C
MMCDXR
MMC Data Transmit Register
0x01E1 0030
MMCCMD
MMC Command Register
0x01E1 0034
MMCARGHL
MMC Argument Register
0x01E1 0038
MMCRSP01
MMC Response Register 0 and 1
0x01E1 003C
MMCRSP23
MMC Response Register 2 and 3
0x01E1 0040
MMCRSP45
MMC Response Register 4 and 5
0x01E1 0044
MMCRSP67
MMC Response Register 6 and 7
0x01E1 0048
MMCDRSP
MMC Data Response Register
0x01E1 004C - 0x01E1 004F
-
Reserved
0x01E1 0050
MMCCIDX
MMC Command Index Register
0x01E1 0054 - 0x01E1 0063
-
Reserved
0x01E1 0064 - 0x01E1 006C
SDIO
0x01E1 0070
-
Reserved
0x01E1 0074
MMCFIFOCTL
MMC FIFO Control Register
0x01E1 0078 - 0x01E1 FFFF
-
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
125
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.11.2 MMC/SD/SDIO Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-35. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD/SDIO Module
(see Figure 6-25 and Figure 6-27)
-270
NO.
STANDARD MODE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tsu(CMDV-CLKH)
Setup time, SD_CMD valid before SD_CLK high
5
ns
2
th(CLKH-CMDV)
Hold time, SD_CMD valid after SD_CLK high
5
ns
3
tsu(DATV-CLKH)
Setup time, SD_DATx valid before SD_CLK high
5
ns
4
th(CLKH-DATV)
Hold time, SD_DATx valid after SD_CLK high
5
ns
Table 6-36. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC/SD/SDIO
Module (1) (see Figure 6-24 through Figure 6-27)
-270
NO.
PARAMETER
STANDARD MODE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
7
f(CLK)
Operating frequency, SD_CLK
0
25
MHz
8
f(CLK_ID)
Identification mode frequency, SD_CLK
0
400
KHz
9
tW(CLKL)
Pulse width, SD_CLK low
10
10
tW(CLKH)
Pulse width, SD_CLK high
10
11
tr(CLK)
Rise time, SD_CLK
10
ns
12
tf(CLK)
Fall time, SD_CLK
10
ns
13
td(CLKLL-CMD)
Delay time, SD_CLK low to SD_CMD transition
-7.5
13
ns
14
tdis(CLKL-DAT)
Disable time, SD_CLK low to SD_DATx transition
-7.5
13
ns
(1)
ns
ns
P = Period of SD_CLK (SYSCLK5), in nanoseconds (ns).
9
10
7
SD_CLK
13
13
13
START
SD_CMD
XMIT
Valid
Valid
13
Valid
END
Figure 6-24. MMC/SD/SDIO Host Command Timing
9
7
10
SD_CLK
1
2
SD_CMD
START
XMIT
Valid
Valid
Valid
END
Figure 6-25. MMC/SD/SDIO Card Response Timing
126
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
9
10
7
SD_CLK
14
14
SD_DATx
14
START
D0
D1
14
Dx
END
Figure 6-26. MMC/SD/SDIO Host Write Timing
9
10
7
SD_CLK
4
4
3
Start
SD_DATx
3
D0
D1
Dx
End
Figure 6-27. MMC/SD/SDIO Host Read and Card CRC Status Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
127
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.12 Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) Overview
The DM357 Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) provides a Video Processing Front End (VPFE) input
interface for external imaging peripherals (i.e., image sensors, video decoders, etc.) and a Video
Processing Back End (VPBE) output interface for display devices, such as analog SDTV displays, digital
LCD panels, HDTV video encoders, etc.
Note: The VPSS module is supported with Linux Application Peripheral Interfaces (APIs) commonly used
by video application developers. Video for Linux 2 or V4L2 uses APIs commonly used for video capture.
The typical use cases of the VPSS Video Front-End (VPFE) have been ported to this Linux API structure.
The VPSS Back-End (VPBE) uses FBDev/DirectFB as the APIs.
The VPSS register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-37.
Table 6-37. VPSS Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 3400
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information
0x01C7 3404
PCR
VPSS Control Register
0x01C7 3408
-
0x01C7 3508
SDR_REG_EXP
0x01C7 350C 0x01C7 3FFF
-
Reserved
SDRAM Non Real-Time Read Request Expand
Reserved
To ensure NTSC- and PAL-compliant output video, the stability of the input clock source is very important.
TI recommends a 27-MHz, 50-ppm crystal. Ceramic oscillators are not recommended. The NTSC/PAL
color sub-carrier frequency is derived from the 27-MHz clock. Therefore, if the 27-MHz clock drifts, then
the color sub-carrier frequency will drift as well. Assuming no 27-MHz frequency drift, the color sub-carrier
frequency is generated as follows:
æ 35 ö
fsc -ntsc = 27 MHz ç
÷ = 3.5795454545 MHz
è 264 ø
æ 167 ö
fsc - pal = 27 MHz ç
÷ = 4.4332628318 MHz
è 1017 ø
To ensure the color sub-carrier frequency will not drift out of spec, the user must follow the crystal
requirements discussed in Section 6.5.1, Clock Input Option 1 – Crystal or Ceramic Resonator.
Alternatively, if the VPBE input clock is sourced from the VPBECLK or VPFE clock inputs, these clocks
must have a frequency stability of ± 50 ppm to ensure the NTSC and PAL compliant output video.
128
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.12.1 Video Processing Front-End (VPFE)
The Video Processing Front-End (VPFE) consists of the CCD Controller (CCDC), Preview Engine,
Resizer, Hardware 3A (H3A) Statistic Generator, and Histogram blocks. Together, these modules provide
DM357 with a powerful and flexible front-end interface. These modules are briefly described below:
• The CCDC provides an interface to image sensors and digital video sources.
• The Preview Engine is a parameterized hardwired image processing block which is used for converting
RAW color data from a Bayer pattern to YUV 4:2:2.
• The Resizer module re-sizes the input image data to the desired display or video encoding resolution
• The H3A module provides control loops for Auto Focus (AF), Auto White Balance (AWB) and Auto
Exposure (AE).
• The Histogram module bins input color pixels, depending on the amplitude, and provides statistics
required to implement various 3A (AE/AF/AWB) algorithms and tune the final image/video output.
The VPFE register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-38.
Table 6-38. VPFE Register Address Range Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C7 0400 – 0x01C7 07FF
CCDC
VPFE – CCD Controller
0x01C7 0800 – 0x01C7 0BFF
PREV
VPFE – Preview Engine/Image Signal Processor
0x01C7 0C00 – 0x01C7 09FF
RESZ
VPFE – Resizer
0x01C7 1000 – 0x01C7 13FF
HIST
VPFE – Histogram
0x01C7 1400 – 0x01C7 17FF
H3A
VPFE – Hardware 3A (Auto-Focus/WB/Exposure)
0x01C7 3400 – 0x01C7 3FFF
VPSS
VPSS Shared Buffer Logic Registers
6.12.1.1 CCD Controller (CCDC)
The CCDC receives raw image/video data from sensors (CMOS or CCD) or YUV video data in numerous
formats from video decoder devices. The following features are supported by the CCDC module.
• Conventional Bayer pattern formats.
• Generates HD/VD timing signals and field ID to an external timing generator or can synchronize to an
external timing generator.
• Interface to progressive and interlaced sensors.
• REC656/CCIR-656 standard (YCbCr 4:2:2 format, either 8- or 16-bit).
• YCbCr 4:2:2 format, either 8- or 16-bit with discrete H and VSYNC signals.
• Up to 16-bit input.
• Optical black clamping signal generation.
• Shutter signal control.
• Digital clamping and black level compensation.
• 10-bit to 8-bit A-law compression.
• Low-pass filter prior to writing to SDRAM. If this filter is enabled, 2 pixels each in the left and right
edges of each line are cropped from the output.
• Output range from 16-bits to 8-bits wide (8-bits wide allows for 50% saving in storage area).
• Downsampling via programmable culling patterns.
• Control output to the DDR2 via an external write enable signal.
• Up to 16K pixels (image size) in both the horizontal and vertical direction.
The CCDC register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-39.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
129
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-39. CCDC Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 0400
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information
0x01C7 0404
PCR
Peripheral Control Register
0x01C7 0408
SYN_MODE
SYNC and Mode Set Register
0x01C7 040C
HD_VD_WID
HD and VD Signal Width
0x01C7 0410
PIX_LINES
Number of Pixels in a Horizontal Line and Number of Lines in a Frame
0x01C7 0414
HORZ_INFO
Horizontal Pixel Information
0x01C7 0418
VERT_START
Vertical Line - Settings for the Starting Pixel
0x01C7 041C
VERT_LINES
Number of Vertical Lines
0x01C7 0420
CULLING
Culling Information in Horizontal and Vertical Directions
0x01C7 0424
HSIZE_OFF
Horizontal Size
0x01C7 0428
SDOFST
SDRAM/DDRAM Line Offset
0x01C7 042C
SDR_ADDR
SDRAM Address
0x01C7 0430
CLAMP
Optical Black Clamping Settings
0x01C7 0434
DCSUB
DC Clamp
0x01C7 0438
COLPTN
CCD Color Pattern
0x01C7 043C
BLKCMP
Black Compensation
0x01C7 0440
-
Reserved
0x01C7 0444
-
Reserved
0x01C7 0448
VDINT
VD Interrupt Timing
0x01C7 044C
ALAW
A-Law Setting
0x01C7 0450
REC656IF
REC656 Interface
0x01C7 0454
CCDCFG
CCD Configuration
0x01C7 0458
FMTCFG
Data Reformatter/Video Port Configuration
0x01C7 045C
FMT_HORZ
Data Reformatter/Video Input Interface Horizontal Information
0x01C7 0460
FMT_VERT
Data Reformatter/Video Input Interface Vertical Information
0x01C7 0464
FMT_ADDR0
Address Pointer 0 Setup
0x01C7 0468
FMT_ADDR1
Address Pointer 1 Setup
0x01C7 046C
FMT_ADDR2
Address Pointer 2 Setup
0x01C7 0470
FMT_ADDR3
Address Pointer 3 Setup
0x01C7 0474
FMT_ADDR4
Address Pointer 4 Setup
0x01C7 0478
FMT_ADDR5
Address Pointer 5 Setup
0x01C7 047C
FMT_ADDR6
Address Pointer 6 Setup
0x01C7 0480
FMT_ADDR7
Address Pointer 7 Setup
0x01C7 0484
PRGEVEN_0
Program Entries 0-7 for Even Line
0x01C7 0488
RRGEVEN_1
Program Entries 8-15 for Even Line
0x01C7 048C
PRGGODD_0
Program Entries 0-7 for Odd Line
0x01C7 0490
PRGGODD_1
Program Entries 8-15 for Odd Line
0x01C7 0494
VP_OUT
Video Port Output Settings
6.12.1.2 Preview Engine
The preview engine transforms raw unprocessed image/video data from a sensor (CMOS or CCD) into
YCbCr 4:2:2 data. The output of the preview engine is used for both video compression and external
display devices such as a NTSC/PAL analog encoder or a digital LCD. The following features are
supported by the preview engine.
• Accepts conventional Bayer pattern formats.
• Input image/video data from either the CCD/CMOS controller or the DDR2 memory.
• Output width up to 1280 pixels wide.
130
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Automatic/mandatory cropping of pixels/lines when edge processing is performed. If all the
corresponding modules are enabled, a total of 14 pixels per line (7 left most and 7 right most) and 8
lines (4 top most and 4 bottom most) will not be output.
Simple horizontal averaging (by factors of 2, 4, or 8) to handle input widths that are greater than 1280
(plus the cropped number) pixels wide.
Dark frame capture to DDR2.
Dark frame subtraction for every input raw data frame, fetched from DDR2, pixel-by-pixel to improve
video quality.
Lens shading compensation. Each input pixel is multiplied with a corresponding 8-bit gain value and
the result is right shifted by a programmable parameter (0-7 bits).
A-law decompression to transform non-linear 8-bit data to 10-bit linear data. This feature allows data in
DDR2 to be 8-bits, which saves 50% of the area if the input to the preview engine is from the DDR2.
Horizontal median filter for reducing temperature induced noise in pixels.
Programmable noise filter that operates on a 3x3 grid of the same color (effectively, this is a five line
storage requirement).
Digital gain and white balance (color separate gain for white balance).
Programmable CFA interpolation that operates on a 5x5 grid.
Conventional Bayer pattern RGB and complementary color sensors.
Support for an image that is downsampled by 2x in the horizontal direction (with and without phase
correction). In this case, the image is 2/3 populated instead of the conventional 1/3 colors.
Support for an image that is downsampled by 2x in both the horizontal and vertical direction. In this
case, the image is fully populated instead of the conventional 1/3 colors.
Programmable RGB-to-RGB blending matrix (9 coefficients for the 3x3 matrix).
Fully programmable gamma correction (1024 entries for each color held in an on-chip RAM).
Programmable color conversion (RGB to YUV) coefficients (9 coefficients for the 3x3 matrix).
Luminance enhancement (non-linear) and chrominance suppression & offset.
The Preview Engine register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-40.
Table 6-40. Preview Engine Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 0800
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information
0x01C7 0804
PCR
Peripheral Control Register
0x01C7 0808
HORZ_INFO
Horizontal Information/Setup
0x01C7 080C
VERT_INFO
Vertical Information/Setup
0x01C7 0810
RSDR_ADDR
Read Address From SDRAM
0x01C7 0814
RADR_OFFSET
Line Offset for the Read Data
0x01C7 0818
DSDR_ADDR
Dark Frame Address From SDRAM
0x01C7 081C
DRKF_OFFSET
Line Offset for the Dark Frame Data
0x01C7 0820
WSDR_ADDR
Write Address to the SDRAM
0x01C7 0824
WADD_OFFSET
Line Offset for the Write Data
0x01C7 0828
AVE
Input Formatter/Averager
0x01C7 082C
HMED
Horizontal Median Filter
0x01C7 0830
NF
Noise Filter
0x01C7 0834
WB_DGAIN
White Balance Digital Gain
0x01C7 0838
WBGAIN
White Balance Coefficients
0x01C7 083C
WBSEL
White Balance Coefficients Selection
0x01C7 0840
CFA
CFA Register
0x01C7 0844
BLKADJOFF
Black Adjustment Offset
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
131
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-40. Preview Engine Register Descriptions (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 0848
RGB_MAT1
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Coefficients
0x01C7 084C
RGB_MAT2
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Coefficients
0x01C7 0850
RGB_MAT3
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Coefficients
0x01C7 0854
RGB_MAT4
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Coefficients
0x01C7 0858
RGB_MAT5
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Coefficients
0x01C7 085C
RGB_OFF1
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Offsets
0x01C7 0860
RGB_OFF2
RGB2RGB Blending Matrix Offsets
0x01C7 0864
CSC0
Color Space Conversion Coefficients
0x01C7 0868
CSC1
Color Space Conversion Coefficients
0x01C7 086C
CSC2
Color Space Conversion Coefficients
0x01C7 0870
CSC_OFFSET
Color Space Conversion Offsets
0x01C7 0874
CNT_BRT
Contrast and Brightness Settings
0x01C7 0878
CSUP
Chrominance Suppression Settings
0x01C7 087C
SETUP_YC
Maximum/Minimum Y and C Settings
0x01C7 0880
SET_TBL_ADDRESS
Setup Table Addresses
0x01C7 0884
SET_TBL_DATA
Setup Table Data
6.12.1.3 Resizer
The resizer module can accept input image/video data from either the preview engine or DDR2. The
output of the resizer module is sent to DDR2. The following features are supported by the resizer module.
• An output width up to 1280 horizontal pixels.
• Input from external DDR2.
• Up to 4x upsampling (digital zoom).
• Bi-cubic interpolation (4-tap horizontal, 4-tap vertical) can be implemented with the programmable filter
coefficients.
• 8 phases of filter coefficients.
• Optional bi-linear interpolation for the chrominance components.
• Up to 1/4x downsampling
• 4-tap horizontal and 4-tap vertical filter coefficients (with 8-phases) for 1x to 1/2x downsampling
• 1/2x to 1/4x downsampling, for 7-tap mode with 4-phases.
• Resizing either YUV 4:2:2 packed data (16-bits) or color separate data (8-bit data within DDR) that is
contiguous.
• Separate/independent resizing factor for the horizontal and vertical directions.
• Upsampling and downsampling ratios that are available are: 256/N, with N ranging from 64 to 1024.
• Programmable luminance sharpening after the horizontal resizing and before the vertical resizing step.
The Resizer register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-41.
Table 6-41. Resizer Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
132
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 0C00
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information
0x01C7 0C04
PCR
Peripheral Control Register
0x01C7 0C08
RSZ_CNT
Resizer Control Bits
0x01C7 0C0C
OUT_SIZE
Output Width and Height After Resizing
0x01C7 0C10
IN_START
Input Starting Information
0x01C7 0C14
IN_SIZE
Input Width and Height Before Resizing
0x01C7 0C18
SDR_INADD
Input SDRAM Address
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-41. Resizer Register Descriptions (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 0C1C
SDR_INOFF
SDRAM Offset for the Input Line
0x01C7 0C20
SDR_OUTADD
Output SDRAM Address
0x01C7 0C24
SDR_OUTOFF
SDRAM Offset for the Output Line
0x01C7 0C28
HFILT10
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 1 and 0
0x01C7 0C2C
HFILT32
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 3 and 2
0x01C7 0C30
HFILT54
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 5 and 4
0x01C7 0C34
HFILT76
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 7 and 6
0x01C7 0C38
HFILT98
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 9 and 8
0x01C7 0C3C
HFILT1110
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 11 and 10
0x01C7 0C40
HFILT1312
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 13 and 12
0x01C7 0C44
HFILT1514
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 15 and 14
0x01C7 0C48
HFILT1716
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 17 and 16
0x01C7 0C4C
HFILT1918
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 19 and 18
0x01C7 0C50
HFILT2120
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 21 and 20
0x01C7 0C54
HFILT2322
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 23 and 22
0x01C7 0C58
HFILT2524
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 25 and 24
0x01C7 0C5C
HFILT2726
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 27 and 26
0x01C7 0C60
HFILT2928
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 29 and 28
0x01C7 0C64
HFILT3130
Horizontal Filter Coefficients 31 and 30
0x01C7 0C68
VFILT10
Vertical Filter Coefficients 1 and 0
0x01C7 0C6C
VFILT32
Vertical Filter Coefficients 3 and 2
0x01C7 0C70
VFILT54
Vertical Filter Coefficients 5 and 4
0x01C7 0C74
VFILT76
Vertical Filter Coefficients 7 and 6
0x01C7 0C78
VFILT98
Vertical Filter Coefficients 9 and 8
0x01C7 0C7C
VFILT1110
Vertical Filter Coefficients 11 and 10
0x01C7 0C80
VFILT1312
Vertical Filter Coefficients 13 and 12
0x01C7 0C84
VFILT1514
Vertical Filter Coefficients 15 and 14
0x01C7 0C88
VFILT1716
Vertical Filter Coefficients 17 and 16
0x01C7 0C8C
VFILT1918
Vertical Filter Coefficients 19 and 18
0x01C7 0C90
VFILT2120
Vertical Filter Coefficients 21 and 20
0x01C7 0C94
VFILT2322
Vertical Filter Coefficients 23 and 22
0x01C7 0C98
VFILT2524
Vertical Filter Coefficients 25 and 24
0x01C7 0C9C
VFILT2726
Vertical Filter Coefficients 27 and 26
0x01C7 0CA0
VFILT2928
Vertical Filter Coefficients 29 and 28
0x01C7 0CA4
VFILT3130
Vertical Filter Coefficients 31 and 30
0x01C7 0CA8
YENH
Luminance Enhancer
6.12.1.4 Hardware 3A (H3A)
The Hardware 3A (H3A) module provides control loops for Auto Focus, Auto White Balance and Auto
Exposure. There are 2 main components of the H3A module:
• Auto Focus (AF) Engine
• Auto Exposure (AE) & Auto White Balance (AWB) Engine
The AF engine extracts and filters the red, green, and blue data from the input image/video data and
provides either the accumulation or peaks of the data in a specified region. The specified region is a two
dimensional block of data and is referred to as a “paxel” for the case of AF.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
133
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
The AE/AWB Engine accumulates the values and checks for saturated values in a sub sampling of the
video data. In the case of the AE/AWB, the two-dimensional block of data is referred to as a “window”.
The number, dimensions, and starting position of the AF paxels and the AE/AWB windows are separately
programmable.
The H3A register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-42.
Table 6-42. H3A Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 1400
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information
0x01C7 1404
PCR
Peripheral Control Register
0x01C7 1408
AFPAX1
Setup for the AF Engine Paxel Configuration
0x01C7 140C
AFPAX2
Setup for the AF Engine Paxel Configuration
0x01C7 1410
AFPAXSTART
Start Position for AF Engine Paxels
0x01C7 1414
AFIIRSH
Start Position for IIRSH
0x01C7 1418
AFBUFST
SDRAM/DDRAM Start Address for AF Engine
0x01C7 141C
AFCOEF010
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 0
0x01C7 1420
AFCOEF032
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 0
0x01C7 1424
AFCOEFF054
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 0
0x01C7 1428
AFCOEFF076
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 0
0x01C7 142C
AFCOEFF098
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 0
0x01C7 1430
AFCOEFF0010
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 0
0x01C7 1434
AFCOEF110
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 1
0x01C7 1438
AFCOEF132
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 1
0x01C7 143C
AFCOEFF154
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 1
0x01C7 1440
AFCOEFF176
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 1
0x01C7 1444
AFCOEFF198
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 1
0x01C7 1448
AFCOEFF1010
IIR Filter Coefficient Data for SET 1
0x01C7 144C
AEWWIN1
Configuration for AE/AWB Windows
0x01C7 1450
AEWINSTART
Start Position for AE/AWB Windows
0x01C7 1454
AEWINBLK
Start Position and Height for Black Line of AE/AWB Windows
0x01C7 1458
AEWSUBWIN
Configuration for Subsample Data in AE/AWB Window
0x01C7 145C
AEWBUFST
SDRAM/DDRAM Start Address for AE/AWB Engine
6.12.1.4.1 Auto Focus (AF) Engine
The following features are supported by the Auto Focus (AF) Engine.
• Peak Mode in a Paxel (a Paxel is defined as a two dimensional block of pixels).
• Accumulate the maximum Focus Value of each line in a Paxel
• Accumulation/Sum Mode (instead of Peak mode).
• Accumulate Focus Value in a Paxel.
• Up to 36 Paxels in the horizontal direction and up to 128 Paxels in the vertical direction.
• Programmable width and height for the Paxel. All paxels in the frame will be of same size.
• Programmable red, green, and blue position within a 2x2 matrix.
• Separate horizontal start for paxel and filtering.
• Programmable vertical line increments within a paxel.
• Parallel IIR filters configured in a dual-biquad configuration with individual coefficients (2 filters with 11
coefficients each). The filters are intended to compute the sharpness/peaks in the frame to focus on.
134
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.12.1.4.2 Auto Exposure (AE) and Auto White Balance (AWB) Engine
The following features are supported by the Auto Exposure (AE) and Auto White Balance (AWB) Engine.
• Accumulate clipped pixels along with all non-saturated pixels.
• Up to 36 horizontal windows.
• Up to 128 vertical windows.
• Programmable width and height for the windows. All windows in the frame will be of same size.
• Separate vertical start coordinate and height for a black row of paxels that is different than the
remaining color paxels.
• Programmable Horizontal Sampling Points in a window.
• Programmable Vertical Sampling Points in a window.
6.12.1.5 Histogram
The histogram module accepts raw image/video data and bins the pixels on a value (and color separate)
basis. The value of the pixel itself is not stored, but each bin contains the number of pixels that are within
the appropriate set range. The source of the raw data for the histogram is typically a CCD/CMOS sensor
(via the CCDC module) or optionally from DDR2. The following features are supported by the histogram
module.
• Up to four regions/areas.
• Separate horizontal/vertical start and end position for each region.
• Pixels from overlapping regions are accumulated into the highest priority region. The priority is: region0
> region1 > region2 > region3.
• Interface to conventional Bayer pattern. Each region can accumulate either 3 or 4 colors.
• 32, 64, 128, or 256 bins per color per region.
• 32, 64, or 128 bins per color for 2 regions.
• 32 or 64 bins per color for 3 or 4 regions.
• Automatic clear of histogram RAM after an ARM read.
• Saturation of the pixel count if the count exceeds the maximum value (each memory location is 20-bit
wide).
• Downshift ranging from 0 to 7 bits (maximum bin range 128).
• The last bin (highest range of values) will accumulate any value that is higher than the lower bound.
The Histogram register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-43.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
135
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-43. Histogram Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
136
REGISTER ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C7 1000
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information Register
0x01C7 1004
PCR
Peripheral Control Register
0x01C7 1008
HIST_CNT
Histogram Control Bits Register
0x01C7 100C
WB_GAIN
White/Channel Balance Settings Register
0x01C7 1010
R0_HORZ
Region 0 Horizontal Information Register
0x01C7 1014
R0_VERT
Region 0 Vertical Information Register
0x01C7 1018
R1_HORZ
Region 1 Horizontal Information Register
0x01C7 101C
R1_VERT
Region 1 Vertical Information Register
0x01C7 1020
R2_HORZ
Region 2 Horizontal Information Register
0x01C7 1024
R2_VERT
Region 2 Vertical Information Register
0x01C7 1028
R3_HORZ
Region 3 Horizontal Information Register
0x01C7 102C
R3_VERT
Region 3 Vertical Information Register
0x01C7 1030
HIST_ADDR
Histogram Address for Data to be Read Register
0x01C7 1034
HIST_DATA
Histogram Data That is Read From the Memory Register
0x01C7 1038
RADD
Read Address From DDR2 Memory Register
0x01C7 103C
RADD_OFF
Read Address Offset for Each Line in the DDR2 Memory Register
0x01C7 1040
H_V_INFO
Horizontal/Vertical Information Register (Horizontal/Vertical Number of
Pixels When Data is Read From DDR2 Memory Information Register)
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.12.1.6 VPFE Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-44. Timing Requirements for VPFE PCLK Master/Slave Mode (see Figure 6-28)
-270
NO.
(1)
MIN
MAX
11.11 or 13.33 (1)
160
UNIT
1
tc(PCLK)
Cycle time, PCLK
2
tw(PCLKH)
Pulse duration, PCLK high
4.4
ns
3
tw(PCLKL)
Pulse duration, PCLK low
4.4
ns
4
tt(PCLK)
Transition time, PCLK
3
ns
ns
When PCLK sources the clock for both the VPFE and VPBE, the minimum cycle time of 13.33 ns (specified in Table 6-51, Timing
Requirements for VPBE CLK Inputs for VPBE) must be met. When PCLK sources the clock for only the VPFE, a minimum cycle time of
11.11 ns may be used.
2
3
1
PCLK
4
4
Figure 6-28. VPFE PCLK Timing
Table 6-45. Timing Requirements for VPFE (CCD) Slave Mode (1) (see Figure 6-29)
-270
NO.
(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
5
tsu(CCDV-PCLK)
Setup time, CCD valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
6
th(PCLK-CCDV)
Hold time, CCD valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
7
tsu(HDV-PCLK)
Setup time, HD valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
8
th(PCLK-HDV)
Hold time, HD valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
9
tsu(VDV-PCLK)
Setup time, VD valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
10
th(PCLK-VDV)
Hold time, VD valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
11
tsu(C_WEV-PCLK)
Setup time, C_WE valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
12
th(PCLK-C_WEV)
Hold time, C_WE valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
13
tsu(C_FIELDV-PCLK)
Setup time, C_FIELD valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
14
th(PCLK-C_FIELDV)
Hold time, C_FIELD valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
The VPFE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode the
rising edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
137
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
8, 10
7, 9
HD/VD
11, 13
12, 14
C_WE/C_FIELD
5
6
CCD[15:0]
Figure 6-29. VPFE (CCD) Slave Mode Input Data Timing
Table 6-46. Timing Requirements for VPFE (CCD) Master Mode (1) (see Figure 6-30)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
15
tsu(CCDV-PCLK)
Setup time, CCD valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
16
th(PCLK-CCDV)
Hold time, CCD valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
23
tsu(CWEV-PCLK)
Setup time, C_WE valid before PCLK edge
3
ns
24
th(PCLK-CWEV)
Hold time, C_WE valid after PCLK edge
2
ns
(1)
The VPFE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode the
rising edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
15
16
CCD[15:0]
23
24
C_WE
Figure 6-30. VPFE (CCD) Master Mode Input Data Timing
138
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-47. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPFE (CCD) Master
Mode (1) (see Figure 6-31)
NO.
(1)
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
18
td(PCLK-HDV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to HD valid
0.5
8
ns
20
td(PCLK-VDV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to VD valid
0.5
8
ns
22
td(PCLK-C_FIELDV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to C_FIELD valid
0.5
8.3
ns
The VPFE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode the
rising edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
18
HD
20
VD
22
C_FIELD
Figure 6-31. VPFE (CCD) Master Mode Control Output Data Timing
6.12.2 Video Processing Back-End (VPBE)
The Video Processing Back-End (VPBE) consists of the On-Screen Display (OSD) module, the Video
Encoder (VENC) including the Digital LCD (DLCD) and Analog (i.e., DAC) interfaces. The video encoder
generates analog video output. The DLCD controller generates digital RGB/YCbCr data output and timing
signals.
The VPBE register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-48.
Table 6-48. VPBE Register Descriptions
Address
Register
0x01C7 2780
PID
Peripheral Revision and Class Information Register
Description
0x01C7 2784
PCR
Peripheral Control Register
6.12.2.1 On-Screen Display (OSD)
The major function of the OSD module is to gather and blend video data and display/bitmap data before
feeding it to the Video Encoder (VENC) in YCbCr format. The video and display data is read from an
external memory, typically DDR2. The OSD is programmed via control and parameter registers. The
following are the primary features that are supported by the OSD.
• Simultaneous display of two video windows and two OSD windows (VIDWIN0/VIDWIN1 and
OSDWIN0/OSDWIN1).
– Separate enable for each window
– Programmable width, height, and base starting coordinates for each window
– External memory address and offset registers for each window
– Support for x2 and x4 zoom in both the horizontal and vertical direction
– OSDWIN1 can be used as an attribute window for OSDWIN0
– Attribute window blinking intervals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
139
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
•
•
www.ti.com
– Field/frame mode for the windows (interlaced/progressive)
– Eight step blending process between the OSD and video windows
– Transparency support for the OSD and video data (when a bitmap pixel is zero, there will be no
blending for that corresponding video pixel)
– Resize from VGA to NTSC/PAL (640x480 to 720x576) for both the OSD and video windows
– Reads in YCbCr data in 4:2:2 format from external memory, with the capability for swapping the
order of the CbCr component in the 32-bit word (this is relevant to the two video windows)
– Support for a ping-pong buffer scheme that can be used for VIDWIN0 (allows for video data to be
accessed from two different locations in DDR2)
– Each OSD window (either one, but not both at the same time) is capable of reading in RGB data
(16-bit data with six bits for the green and five bits each for the red and blue colors) instead of
bitmap data in YCbCr format restricted to a maximum of 8-bits
– The OSD bitmap data width is selectable between 1, 2, 4, or 8-bits.
– Each OSD window supports 16 entries for the bitmap (to index into a 256 entry RAM/ROM CLUT
table).
– Indirect support for 24-bit RGB input data (which will be transformed into 16-bit YCbCr video
window data) via the wrapper interface in the VPBE.
Support for a rectangular cursor window and a programmable background color selection.
– Programmable color palette with the ability to select between a RAM/ROM table with support for
256 colors.
– The width, height, and color of the cursor is programmable.
– The display priority is: Rectangular-Cursor > OSDWIN1 > OSDWIN0 > VIDWIN1 > VIDWIN0 >
background color
Support for attenuation of the YCbCr values for the REC601 standard.
The following restrictions exist in the OSD module.
• Both the OSD windows and VIDWIN1 should be fully contained inside VIDWIN0.
• When one of the OSD windows is set in RGB mode, it cannot overlap with VIDWIN1.
• The OSD cannot support more than 256 color entries in the CLUT RAM/ROM. Some applications
require higher number of entries, and one workaround is to use VIDWIN1 as an overlay mimicking the
OSD window. Another option is to use the RGB mode for one of the OSD windows which allows for a
total of 16-bits for the R, G, and B colors (64K colors).
• The OSD can only read YCbCr in 4:2:2 interleaved format for the video windows. Other formats, either
color separate storage or 4:4:4/4:2:0 interleaved data is not supported.
• If the vertical resize filter is enabled for either of the video windows, the maximum horizontal window
dimension cannot be greater than 720 currently.
• It is not possible to use both of the CLUT ROMs at the same time. However, one window can use
RAM while another uses ROM.
• The 24-bit RGB input mode is only valid for one of the two video windows (programmable) and does
not apply to the OSD windows.
The OSD register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-49.
Table 6-49. OSD Register Descriptions
Address
140
Register
Description
0x01C7 2600
MODE
OSD Mode Register
0x01C7 2604
VIDWINMD
Video Window Mode Setup
0x01C7 2608
OSDWIN0MD
OSD Window Mode Setup
0x01C7 260C
OSDWIN1MD
OSD Window 1 Mode Setup (when used as a second OSD window)
0x01C7 260C
OSDATRMD
OSD Attribute Window Mode Setup (when used as an attribute window)
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-49. OSD Register Descriptions (continued)
0x01C7 2610
RECTCUR
Rectangular Cursor Setup
0x01C7 2614
RSV0
Reserved
0x01C7 2618
VIDWIN0OFST
Video Window 0 Offset
0x01C7 261C
VIDWIN1OFST
Video Window 1 Offset
0x01C7 2620
OSDWIN0OFST
OSD Window 0 Offset
0x01C7 2624
OSDWIN1OFST
OSD Window 1 Offset
0x01C7 2628
RSV1
Reserved
0x01C7 262C
VIDWIN0ADR
Video Window 0 Address
0x01C7 2630
VIDWIN1ADR
Video Window 1 Address
0x01C7 2634
RSV2
Reserved
0x01C7 2638
OSDWIN0ADR
OSD Window 0 Address
0x01C7 263C
OSDWIN1ADR
OSD Window 1 Address
0x01C7 2640
BASEPX
Base Pixel X
0x01C7 2644
BASEPY
Base Pixel Y
0x01C7 2648
VIDWIN0XP
Video Window 0 X-Position
0x01C7 264C
VIDWIN0YP
Video Window 0 Y-Position
0x01C7 2650
VIDWIN0XL
Video Window 0 X-Size
0x01C7 2654
VIDWIN0YL
Video Window 0 Y-Size
0x01C7 2658
VIDWIN1XP
Video Window 1 X-Position
0x01C7 265C
VIDWIN1YP
Video Window 1 Y-Position
0x01C7 2660
VIDWIN1XL
Video Window 1 X-Size
0x01C7 2664
VIDWIN1YL
Video Window 1 Y-Size
0x01C7 2668
OSDWIN0XP
OSD Bitmap Window 0 X-Position
0x01C7 266C
OSDWIN0YP
OSD Bitmap Window 0 Y-Position
0x01C7 2670
OSDWIN0XL
OSD Bitmap Window 0 X-Size
0x01C7 2674
OSDWIN0YL
OSD Bitmap Window 0 Y-Size
0x01C7 2678
OSDWIN1XP
OSD Bitmap Window 1 X-Position
0x01C7 267C
OSDWIN1YP
OSD Bitmap Window 1 Y-Position
0x01C7 2680
OSDWIN1XL
OSD Bitmap Window 1 X-Size
0x01C7 2684
OSDWIN1YL
OSD Bitmap Window 1 Y-Size
0x01C7 2688
CURXP
Rectangular Cursor Window X-Position
0x01C7 268C
CURYP
Rectangular Cursor Window Y-Position
0x01C7 2690
CURXL
Rectangular Cursor Window X-Size
0x01C7 2694
CURYL
Rectangular Cursor Window Y-Size
0x01C7 2698
RSV3
Reserved
0x01C7 269C
RSV4
Reserved
0x01C7 26A0
W0BMP01
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 0/1
0x01C7 26A4
W0BMP23
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 2/3
0x01C7 26A8
W0BMP45
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 4/5
0x01C7 26AC
W0BMP67
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 6/7
0x01C7 26B0
W0BMP89
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 8/9
0x01C7 26B4
W0BMPAB
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map A/B
0x01C7 26B8
W0BMPCD
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map C/D
0x01C7 26BC
W0BMPEF
Window 0 Bitmap Value to Palette Map E/F
0x01C7 26C0
W1BMP01
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 0/1
0x01C7 26C4
W1BMP23
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 2/3
0x01C7 26C8
W1BMP45
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 4/5
0x01C7 26CC
W1BMP67
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 6/7
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
141
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-49. OSD Register Descriptions (continued)
0x01C7 26D0
W1BMP89
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map 8/9
0x01C7 26D4
W1BMPAB
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map A/B
0x01C7 26D8
W1BMPCD
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map C/D
0x01C7 26DC
W1BMPEF
Window 1 Bitmap Value to Palette Map E/F
0x01C7 26E0
-
Reserved
0x01C7 26E4
RSV5
Reserved
0x01C7 26E8
MISCCTL
Miscellaneous Control
0x01C7 26EC
CLUTRAMYCB
CLUT RAMYCB Setup
0x01C7 26F0
CLUTRAMCR
CLUT RAM Setup
0x01C7 26F4
TRANSPVAL
CLUT RAM Setup
0x01C7 26F8
RSV6
Reserved
0x01C7 26FC
PPVWIN0ADR
Ping-Pong Video Window 0 Address
6.12.2.2 Video Encoder (VENC)
Analog/DACs interface of the Video Encoder (VENC) supports the following features.
• Master Clock Input - 27MHz (x2 Upsampling)
• SDTV Support
– Composite NTSC-M, PAL-B/D/G/H/I
– S-Video (Y/C)
– Component YPbPr (SMPTE/EBU N10, Betacam, MII)
– RGB
– Non-Interlace
– CGMS/WSS
– Line 21 Closed Caption Data Encoding
– Chroma Low Pass Filter 1.5MHz/3MHz
– Programmable SC-H phase
• HDTV Support
– Progressive Output (525p/625p)
– Component YPbPr
– RGB
– CGMS/WSS
• 4 10-bit Over-Sampling D/A Converters
• Optional 7.5% Pedestal
• 16-235/0-255 Input Amplitude Selectable
• Programmable Luma Delay
• Master/Slave Operation
• Internal Color Bar Generation (100%/75%)
The Digital LCD Controller (DLCD) of the VENC supports the following features.
• Programmable DCLK
• Various Output Formats
– YCbCr 16bit
– YCbCr 8bit
– ITU-R BT. 656
– Parallel RGB 24bit
• Low Pass Filter for Digital RGB Output
• Programmable Timing Generator
142
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
•
•
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Master/Slave Operation
Internal Color Bar Generation (100%/75%)
The VENC register memory mapping including the Digital LCD and DACs is shown in Table 6-50.
Table 6-50. VENC (Including Digital LCD and DACs) Register Descriptions
Address
Register
Description
0x01C7 2400
VMOD
Video Mode
0x01C7 2404
VIDCTL
Video Interface I/O Control
0x01C7 2408
VDPRO
Video Data Processing
0x01C7 240C
SYNCCTL
Sync Control
0x01C7 2410
HSPLS
Horizontal Sync Pulse Width
0x01C7 2414
VSPLS
Vertical Sync Pulse Width
0x01C7 2418
HINT
Horizontal Interval
0x01C7 241C
HSTART
Horizontal Valid Data Start Position
0x01C7 2420
HVALID
Horizontal Data Valid Range
0x01C7 2424
VINT
Vertical Interval
0x01C7 2428
VSTART
Vertical Valid Data Start Position
0x01C7 242C
VVALID
Vertical Data Valid Range
0x01C7 2430
HSDLY
Horizontal Sync Delay
0x01C7 2434
VSDLY
Vertical Sync Delay
0x01C7 2438
YCCTL
YCbCr Control
0x01C7 243C
RGBCTL
RGB Control
0x01C7 2440
RGBCLP
RGB Level Clipping
0x01C7 2444
LINECTL
Line ID Control
0x01C7 2448
CULLLINE
Culling Line Control
0x01C7 244C
LCDOUT
LCD Output Signal Control
0x01C7 2450
BRTS
Brightness Start Position Signal Control
0x01C7 2454
BRTW
Brightness Width Signal Control
0x01C7 2458
ACCTL
LCD_AC Signal Control
0x01C7 245C
PWMP
PWM Start Position Signal Control
0x01C7 2460
PWMW
PWM Width Signal Control
0x01C7 2464
DCLKCTL
DCLK Control
0x01C7 2468
DCLKPTN0
DCLK Pattern 0
0x01C7 246C
DCLKPTN1
DCLK Pattern 1
0x01C7 2470
DCLKPTN2
DCLK Pattern 2
0x01C7 2474
DCLKPTN3
DCLK Pattern 3
0x01C7 2478
DCLKPTN0A
DCLK Auxiliary Pattern 0
0x01C7 247C
DCLKPTN1A
DCLK Auxiliary Pattern 1
0x01C7 2480
DCLKPTN2A
DCLK Auxiliary Pattern 2
0x01C7 2484
DCLKPTN3A
DCLK Auxiliary Pattern 3
0x01C7 2488
DCLKHS
Horizontal DCLK Mask Start
0x01C7 248C
DCLKHSA
Horizontal Auxiliary DCLK Mask Start
0x01C7 2490
DCLKHR
Horizontal DCLK Mask Range
0x01C7 2494
DCLKVS
Vertical DCLK Mask Start
0x01C7 2498
DCLKVR
Vertical DCLK Mask Range
0x01C7 249C
CAPCTL
Caption Control
0x01C7 24A0
CAPDO
Caption Data Odd Field
0x01C7 24A4
CAPDE
Caption Data Even Field
0x01C7 24A8
ATR0
Video Attribute Data # 0
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
143
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-50. VENC (Including Digital LCD and DACs) Register Descriptions (continued)
0x01C7 24AC
ATR1
Video Attribute Data # 1
0x01C7 24B0
ATR2
Video Attribute Data # 2
0x01C7 24B4
0x01C7 24B4
Reserved
0x01C7 24B4
0x01C7 24B4
0x01C7 24B8
VSTAT
0x01C7 24BC
Video Status
Reserved
0x01C7 24C0
0x01C7 24C4
DACTST
DAC Test
0x01C7 24C8
YCOLVL
YOUT and COUT Levels
0x01C7 24CC
SCPROG
Sub-Carrier Programming
0x01C7 24D0
0x01C7 24D4
Reserved
0x01C7 24D8
0x01C7 24DC
CVBS
Composite Mode
0x01C7 24E0
CMPNT
Component Mode
0x01C7 24E4
ETMG0
CVBS Timing Control 0
0x01C7 24E8
ETMG1
CVBS Timing Control 1
0x01C7 24EC
ETMG2
Component Timing Control 0
0x01C7 24F0
ETMG3
Component Timing Control 1
0x01C7 24F4
DACSEL
DAC Output Select
0x01C7 24F8
Reserved
0x01C7 24FC
144
0x01C7 2500
ARGBX0
Analog RGB Matrix 0
0x01C7 2504
ARGBX1
Analog RGB Matrix 1
0x01C7 2508
ARGBX2
Analog RGB Matrix 2
0x01C7 250C
ARGBX3
Analog RGB Matrix 3
0x01C7 2510
ARGBX4
Analog RGB Matrix 4
0x01C7 2514
DRGBX0
Digital RGB Matrix 0
0x01C7 2518
DRGBX1
Digital RGB Matrix 1
0x01C7 251C
DRGBX2
Digital RGB Matrix 2
0x01C7 2520
DRGBX3
Digital RGB Matrix 3
0x01C7 2524
DRGBX4
Digital RGB Matrix 4
0x01C7 2528
VSTARTA
Vertical Data Valid Start Position for Even Field
0x01C7 252C
OSDCLK0
OSD Clock Control 0
0x01C7 2530
OSDCLK1
OSD Clock Control 1
0x01C7 2534
HVLDCL0
Horizontal Valid Culling Control 0
0x01C7 2538
HVLDCL1
Horizontal Valid Culling Control 1
0x01C7 253C
OSDHADV
OSD Horizontal Sync Advance
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.12.2.3 VPBE Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-51. Timing Requirements for VPBE CLK Inputs (see Figure 6-32)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
13.33
160
UNIT
1
tc(PCLK)
Cycle time, PCLK
2
tw(PCLKH)
Pulse duration, PCLK high
5.7
ns
3
tw(PCLKL)
Pulse duration, PCLK low
5.7
ns
4
tt(PCLK)
Transition time, PCLK
5
tc(VPBECLK)
Cycle time, VPBECLK
6
tw(VPBECLKH)
Pulse duration, VPBECLK high
5.7
ns
7
tw(VPBECLKL)
Pulse duration, VPBECLK low
5.7
ns
8
tt(VPBECLK)
Transition time, VPBECLK
13.33
ns
3
ns
160
ns
3
ns
3
2
1
PCLK
6
4
5
7
4
VPBECLK
8
8
Figure 6-32. VPBE PCLK and VPBECLK Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
145
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-52. Timing Requirements for VPBE Control Input With Respect to PCLK and VPBECLK (1) (see
Figure 6-33)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
9
tsu(VCTLV-PCLK)
Setup time, VCTL valid before PCLK edge
10
th(PCLK-VCTLV)
Hold time, VCTL valid after PCLK edge
27
tsu(VCTLV-VPBECLK)
Setup time, VCTL valid before VPBECLK rising edge
28
th(VPBECLK-VCTLV)
Hold time, VCTL valid after VPBECLK rising edge
33
tsu(FIELD-PCLK)
Setup time, LCD_FIELD valid before PCLK edge
34
th(PCLK-FIELD)
Hold time, LCD_FIELD valid after PCLK edge
5P (2)
ns
35
tsu(FIELD-VPBECLK)
Setup time, LCD_FIELD valid before VPBECLK edge
5P (2)
ns
(2)
ns
36
(1)
th(VPBECLK-FIELD)
Hold time, LCD_FIELD valid after VPBECLK edge
2
ns
0.5
ns
2
ns
0.5
ns
5P (2)
ns
5P
PCLK may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the rising
edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.
P = 1/(VCLKIN clock frequency) in ns. VCLKIN is either PCLK or VPBECLK, whichever is used.
(2)
VPBECLK
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
10
9
28
27
VCTL(A)
34
33
36
35
LCD_FIELD
A. VCTL = HSYNC and VSYNC
Figure 6-33. VPBE Input Timing With Respect to PCLK and VPBECLK
146
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-53. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and
Data Output With Respect to PCLK and VPBECLK (1) (see Figure 6-34)
NO.
(1)
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
11
td(PCLK-VCTLV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to VCTL valid
12
td(PCLK-VCTLIV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to VCTL invalid
13
td(PCLK-VDATAV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to VDATA valid
14
td(PCLK-VDATAIV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to VDATA invalid
29
td(VPBECLK-VCTLV)
Delay time, VPBECLK rising edge to VCTL valid
30
td(VPBECLK-VCTLIV)
Delay time, VPBECLK rising edge to VCTL invalid
31
td(VPBECLK-VDATAV)
Delay time, VPBECLK rising edge to VDATA valid
32
td(VPBECLK-VDATAIV)
Delay time, VPBECLK rising edge to VDATA invalid
MAX
13.3
2
UNIT
ns
ns
13.3
2
ns
ns
13.3
2
ns
ns
13.3
2
ns
ns
PCLK may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the rising
edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.
VPBECLK
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
11, 29
12, 30
13, 31
14, 32
VCTL(A)
VDATA(B)
A. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, LCD_FIELD, and LCD_OE
B. VDATA = COUT[7:0], YOUT[7:0], R[7:0], G[7:0], and B[7:0]
Figure 6-34. VPBE Output Timing With Respect to PCLK and VPBECLK
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
147
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-54. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and
Data Output With Respect to VCLK (1) (2) (see Figure 6-35)
NO.
17
18
MODE (3)
PARAMETER
tc(VCLK)
Cycle time, VCLK
tw(VCLKH)
-270
MIN
13.33
160
ns
H - 1.3 (4)
H - 0.3 (4)
ns
Pulse duration, VCLK high (negative-edge clocking)
L - 1.3 (4)
L - 0.3 (4)
ns
Pulse duration, VCLK low (positive-edge clocking)
L + 0.3
(4)
(4)
ns
Pulse duration, VCLK low (negative-edge clocking)
H + 0.3 (4) H + 1.3 (4)
ns
3
ns
12
ns
tw(VCLKL)
20
tt(VCLK)
Transition time, VCLK
21
td(VCLKINH-VCLKH)
Delay time, VCLKIN high to VCLK high
2
22
td(VCLKINL-VCLKL)
Delay time, VCLKIN low to VCTL low
2
td(VCLK-VCTLV)
24
td(VCLKL-VCTLIV)
25
td(VCLK-VDATAV)
12
ns
7.5
ns
Delay time, VCLK positive edge to VCTL valid
6.9
ns
Delay time, VCLK negative edge to VCTL invalid
2
Delay time, VCLK positive edge to VCTL invalid
(2)
(3)
(4)
ns
1.5
Delay time, VCLK negative edge to VDATA valid
Delay time, VCLK positive edge to VDATA valid
td(VCLKL-VDATAIV)
Delay time, VCLK positive edge to VDATA invalid
(1)
L + 1.3
Delay time, VCLK negative edge to VCTL valid
Delay time, VCLK negative edge to VDATA invalid
26
UNIT
Pulse duration, VCLK high (positive-edge clocking)
19
23
MAX
ns
6.8
ns
6.3
ns
RGB
2.1
ns
YCC
2.5
ns
RGB
1.9
ns
YCC
2.1
ns
The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the
rising edge of VCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLK is referenced.
VCLKIN = PCLK or VPBECLK
RGB and YCC modes utilize different data pins. RGB mode uses data pins: R[7:0], G[7:0], and B[7:0]. YCC mode uses data pins:
COUT[7:0] and YOUT[7:0].
H and L are the high and low pulse widths of the input clock to the VPBE, respectively. For example, if VPBECLK is used as the input
clock and it has a high pulse duration of 6.67 ns, the resulting high pulse duration of VCLK, if positive-edge clocking is selected, will be a
MAX of 6.37 ns and a MIN of 5.27 ns.
VCLKIN(A)
21
VCLK
18
17
22
19
(Positive Edge
Clocking)
VCLK
(Negative Edge
Clocking)
23
24
25
26
20
20
VCTL(B)
VDATA(C)
A. VCLKIN = PCLK or VPBECLK
B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, LCD_FIELD, and LCD_OE
C. VDATA = COUT[7:0], YOUT[7:0], R[7:0], G[7:0], and B[7:0]
Figure 6-35. VPBE Control and Data Output Timing With Respect to VCLK
148
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.12.2.4 DAC Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-55. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DAC Static
Specifications
NO.
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
DC Accuracy
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)
Analog Output
Offset Error
Gain Error
Full-Scale Output Voltage
-270
MIN
TYP
-1.0
-0.5
1.0
0.5
RLOAD = 500 Ω
Output Capacitance
Reference
Reference Voltage Range (VREF)
Full-Scale Current Adjust Resistor (RBIAS)
UNIT
MAX
0.475
3.8
LSB
LSB
0.5
5
500
LSB
%FS
mVPP
200
pF
0.5
4.0
0.525
4.2
V
kΩ
Table 6-56. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for DAC Dynamic
Specifications
NO.
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
-270
MIN
Output Update Rate (FCLK)
Signal Bandwidth
FCLK = 27 MHz
SFDR to Nyquist
FOUT = 2.0 MHz
FCLK = 60 MHz
FOUT = 2.0 MHz
FCLK = 27 MHz
SFDR within Bandwidth
FOUT = 2.0 MHz
FCLK = 60 MHz
FOUT = 2.0 MHz
PSRR Over Temp vs Power Supply
Submit Documentation Feedback
TYP
MAX
27
60
UNIT
MHz
6
MHz
60
dB
60
dB
60
db
60
dB
50
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
dB
149
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
The DM357's analog video DAC outputs are designed to drive a 500-Ω load. Figure 6-36 describes a
typical circuit that will permit connecting the analog video output from the DM357 device to standard 75-Ω
impedance video systems. Another solution is to use a Video Amplifier, such as the Texas Instruments'
OPA361, which provides a complete solution to the typical output circuit shown in Figure 6-36.
DAC
IOUT
Low-Pass Filter
fc = 6.5 MHz
~RLOAD = 500 Ω
Amplifier
Gain = 5.6 V/V
75 Ω
75 Ω
Figure 6-36. Typical Output Circuit for NTSC/PAL Video From DACs
150
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.13 Host-Port Interface (HPI)
The Host Port Interface (HPI) provides a parallel port through which an external host processor can
access the DM357 memory space. The host device is asynchronous to the DM357 clocks and functions
as a master to the HPI interface. The HPI enables a host device and DM357 to exchange information via
internal or external memory. Both the host and DM357 can access the HPI control register (HPIC) and the
HPI address registers (HPIAR, HPIAW). The host can access the HPI data register (HPID) and the HPIC
by using the external data and interface control signals.
The HPI interface shares the DaVinci EMIFA 16-bit data bus pins for multiplexed address/data and
supports the following modes:
• 16 Bit Multiplexed mode / dual half-word cycles (16 bit host data bus/32 bit memory width)
• The ROM supports booting of DM357 ARM processor from an external processor
The HPI registers are summarized in Table 6-57. For more detailed information on the HPI peripheral, see
the Documentation Support section for the Host Port Interface (HPI) Reference Guide.
Table 6-57. Host-Port Interface (HPI) Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C4 0030
HPI_CTL
0x01C6 7800
HPI_PID
0x01C6 7804
HPIPWREMU
Host-Port Interface Configuration Register
HPI Power and Emulation Management Register
0x01C6 7808 - 0x01C6 782F
–
0x01C6 7830
HPIC
Reserved
0x01C6 7834
HPIAW
Host-Port Interface Write Address Register
0x01C6 7838
HPIAR
Host-Port Interface Read Address Register
0x01C6 783C - 0x01C6 7FFF
–
Host-Port Interface Control Register
Reserved
The HPI_CTL register sets the owner of HPIA(R/W) and HPIC registers for HPI address and control. The
details for HPI_CTL are shown in Figure 6-37 and Table 6-58.
Figure 6-37. HPI_CTL Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
R-0000000000000000
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
CTL
ADD
MODE MODE
Reserved
R-0
R/W-0
TIMOUT
R/W-0
R/W-10000000
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset
Table 6-58. HPI_CTL Register Description
Name
Description
CTLMODE
HPIC register write access
0 = External Host
1 = DM357 (if ADDMODE = 1)
ADDMODE
HPIA register write access
0 = External Host
1 = DM357
TIMOUT
Host burst write timeout value
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
151
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.13.1
www.ti.com
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-59. Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface Cycles (1) (2) (see Figure 6-38 through Figure 6-39)
-270
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
Setup time, select signals (3) valid before HSTROBE low
5
ns
2
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Hold time, select signals (3) valid after HSTROBE low
2
ns
3
tw(HSTBL)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low
15
ns
4
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
2P
ns
12
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
5
ns
13
th(HSTBH-HDV)
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
0
ns
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBH)
Hold time, HSTROBE high after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be
inactivated until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete
properly.
2
ns
(1)
(2)
(3)
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when SYSCLK1 is 540 MHz, use P = 1.68 ns.
Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0] and HR/W. For HPI16 mode only, select signals also include HHWIL.
Table 6-60. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Host-Port
Interface Cycles (1) (see Figure 6-38 through Figure 6-39)
NO.
PARAMETER
-270
MIN
MAX
12
UNIT
6
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high (2)
0
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read
0
ns
8
td(HDV-HRDYL)
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
0
ns
9
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid (HPI16 mode, 2nd half-word
only)
20
td(HCSL-HRDYH)
Delay time, HCS low to HRDY high
(1)
(2)
152
1.5
0
ns
ns
7
ns
15
ns
12
ns
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
This parameter is used during HPID reads and writes. For reads, at the beginning of the first half-word transfer (HPI16) on the falling
edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until the
EDMA internal address generation hardware loads the requested data into HPID. For writes, HRDY goes high if the internal write buffer
is full.
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
4
3
3
HSTROBE(A)
HCS
15
9
7
15
9
16
HD[15:0] (output)
HRDY
A.
6
20
1st half-word
2nd half-word
8
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 6-38. HPI16 Read Timing
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
3
3
4
HSTROBE(A)
HCS
12
12
13
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st half-word
HRDY
A.
20
6
2nd half-word
14
HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 6-39. HPI16 Write Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
153
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.14
www.ti.com
USB 2.0
The DM357 USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features:
• USB 2.0 peripheral at speeds high speed (HS: 480 Mb/s) and full speed (FS: 12 Mb/s)
• USB 2.0 host at speeds HS, FS, and low speed (LS: 1.5 Mb/s)
• All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous)
• 4 Transmit (TX) and 4 Receive (RX) endpoints in addition to endpoint 0
• FIFO RAM
– 4KB endpoint
– Programmable size
• Integrated PHY
• RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB
6.14.1 USBPHY_CTL Register Description
The USB physical interface control register USBPHY_CTL is described in Figure 6-40 and Table 6-61.
Figure 6-40. USBPHY_CTL Register
31
9
Reserved
8
7
PHYCLKGD SESNDEN
R-0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
R-0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VBDTCTEN
RSV
PHYPLLON
CLKO1SEL
OSCPDWN
RSV
PHYPDWN
R/W-1
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset
Table 6-61. USBPHY_CTL Register Descriptions
Name
Description
PHYCLKGD
USB PHY Power and Clock Good
0 = Phy power not ramped or PLL not locked
1 = Phy power is good and PLL is locked
SESNDEN
Session End Comparator enable
0 = comparator disabled
1 = comparator enabled
VBDTCTEN
vbus comparator enable
0 = comparators (except session end) disabled
1 = comparators (except session end) enabled
PHYPLLON
USB PHY PLL suspend override
0 = Normal PLL operation
1 = Override PLL suspend state
CLKO1SEL
CLK_OUT1 frequency select
0 = 24 MHz
1 = 12 MHz
OSCPDWN
USB PHY oscillator power down control
0 = PHY oscillator powered
1 = PHY oscillator power off
PHYPDWN
USB PHY power down control
0 = PHY powered
1 = PHY power off
154
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.14.2 USB2.0 Peripheral Register Description(s)
The USB register memory mapping is shown in Table 6-62.
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions
Acronym
Register Description
0x01C6 4000
Address
REVR
Revision Register
0x01C6 4004
CTRLR
Control Register
0x01C6 4008
STATR
Status Register
0x01C6 4010
RNDISR
RNDIS Register
0x01C6 4014
AUTOREQ
Auto Request Register
0x01C6 4020
INTSRCR
USB Interrupt Source Register
0x01C6 4024
INTSETR
USB Interrupt Source Set Register
0x01C6 4028
INTCLRR
USB Interrupt Source Clear Register
0x01C6 402C
INTMSKR
USB Interrupt Mask Register
0x01C6 4030
INTMSKSETR
USB Interrupt Mask Set Register
0x01C6 4034
INTMSKCLRR
USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register
0x01C6 4038
INTMASKEDR
USB Interrupt Source Masked Register
0x01C6 403C
EOIR
USB End of Interrupt Register
0x01C6 4040
INTVECTR
USB Interrupt Vector Register
0x01C6 4080
TCPPICR
TX CPPI Control Register
0x01C6 4084
TCPPITDR
TX CPPI Teardown Register
0x01C6 4088
TCPPIEOIR
TX CPPI DMA Controller End of Interrupt Register
0x01C6 408C
TCPPIIVECTR
TX CPPI DMA Controller Interrupt Vector Register
0x01C6 4090
TCPPIMSKSR
TX CPPI Masked Status Register
0x01C6 4094
TCPPIRAWSR
TX CPPI Raw Status Register
0x01C6 4098
TCPPIIENSETR
TX CPPI Interrupt Enable Set Register
0x01C6 409C
TCPPIIENCLRR
TX CPPI Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01C6 40C0
RCPPICR
RX CPPI Control Register
0x01C6 40D0
RCPPIMSKSR
RX CPPI Masked Status Register
0x01C6 40D4
RCPPIRAWSR
RX CPPI Raw Status Register
0x01C6 40D8
RCPPIENSETR
RX CPPI Interrupt Enable Set Register
0x01C6 40DC
RCPPIIENCLRR
RX CPPI Interrupt Enable Clear Register
0x01C6 40E0
RBUFCNT0
RX Buffer Count 0 Register
0x01C6 40E4
RBUFCNT1
RX Buffer Count 1 Register
0x01C6 40E8
RBUFCNT2
RX Buffer Count 2 Register
0x01C6 40EC
RBUFCNT3
RX Buffer Count 3 Register
TX/RX CCPI Channel 0 State Block
0x01C6 4100
TCPPIDMASTATEW0
TX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 4104
TCPPIDMASTATEW1
TX CPPI DMA State Word 1
0x01C6 4108
TCPPIDMASTATEW2
TX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 410C
TCPPIDMASTATEW3
TX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 4110
TCPPIDMASTATEW4
TX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 4114
TCPPIDMASTATEW5
TX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 4118
TCPPIDMASTATEW6
TX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 411C
TCPPICOMPPTR
TX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 4120
RCPPIDMASTATEW0
RX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 4124
RCPPIDMASTATEW1
RX CPPI DMA State Word 1
0x01C6 4128
RCPPIDMASTATEW2
RX CPPI DMA State Word 2
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
155
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions (continued)
Acronym
Register Description
0x01C6 412C
Address
RCPPIDMASTATEW3
RX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 4130
RCPPIDMASTATEW4
RX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 4134
RCPPIDMASTATEW5
RX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 4138
RCPPIDMASTATEW6
RX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 413C
RCPPICOMPPTR
RX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 4140
TCPPIDMASTATEW0
TX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 4144
TCPPIDMASTATEW1
TX CPPI DMA State Word 1
0x01C6 4148
TCPPIDMASTATEW2
TX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 414C
TCPPIDMASTATEW3
TX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 4150
TCPPIDMASTATEW4
TX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 4154
TCPPIDMASTATEW5
TX CPPI DMA State Word 5
TX/RX CCPI Channel 1 State Block
0x01C6 4158
TCPPIDMASTATEW6
TX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 415C
TCPPICOMPPTR
TX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 4160
RCPPIDMASTATEW0
RX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 4164
RCPPIDMASTATEW1
RX CPPI DMA State Word 1
0x01C6 4168
RCPPIDMASTATEW2
RX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 416C
RCPPIDMASTATEW3
RX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 4170
RCPPIDMASTATEW4
RX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 4174
RCPPIDMASTATEW5
RX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 4178
RCPPIDMASTATEW6
RX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 417C
RCPPICOMPPTR
RX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 4180
TCPPIDMASTATEW0
TX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 4184
TCPPIDMASTATEW1
TX CPPI DMA State Word 1
TX/RX CCPI Channel 2 State Block
0x01C6 4188
TCPPIDMASTATEW2
TX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 418C
TCPPIDMASTATEW3
TX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 4190
TCPPIDMASTATEW4
TX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 4194
TCPPIDMASTATEW5
TX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 4198
TCPPIDMASTATEW6
TX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 419C
TCPPICOMPPTR
TX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 41A0
RCPPIDMASTATEW0
RX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 41A4
RCPPIDMASTATEW1
RX CPPI DMA State Word 1
0x01C6 41A8
RCPPIDMASTATEW2
RX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 41AC
RCPPIDMASTATEW3
RX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 41BA
RCPPIDMASTATEW4
RX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 41B4
RCPPIDMASTATEW5
RX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 41B8
RCPPIDMASTATEW6
RX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 41BC
RCPPICOMPPTR
RX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 41C0
TCPPIDMASTATEW0
TX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 41C4
TCPPIDMASTATEW1
TX CPPI DMA State Word 1
TX/RX CCPI Channel 3 State Block
156
0x01C6 41C8
TCPPIDMASTATEW2
TX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 41CC
TCPPIDMASTATEW3
TX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 41D0
TCPPIDMASTATEW4
TX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 41D4
TCPPIDMASTATEW5
TX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 41D8
TCPPIDMASTATEW6
TX CPPI DMA State Word 6
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions (continued)
Acronym
Register Description
0x01C6 41DC
Address
TCPPICOMPPTR
TX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 41E0
RCPPIDMASTATEW0
RX CPPI DMA State Word 0
0x01C6 41E4
RCPPIDMASTATEW1
RX CPPI DMA State Word 1
0x01C6 41E8
RCPPIDMASTATEW2
RX CPPI DMA State Word 2
0x01C6 41EC
RCPPIDMASTATEW3
RX CPPI DMA State Word 3
0x01C6 41F0
RCPPIDMASTATEW4
RX CPPI DMA State Word 4
0x01C6 41F4
RCPPIDMASTATEW5
RX CPPI DMA State Word 5
0x01C6 41F8
RCPPIDMASTATEW6
RX CPPI DMA State Word 6
0x01C6 41FC
RCPPICOMPPTR
RX CPPI Completion Pointer
0x01C6 4400
FADDR
Function Address Register
0x01C6 4401
POWER
Power Management Register
0x01C6 4402
INTRTX
Interrupt Register for Endpoint 0 plus TX Endpoints 1 to 4
0x01C6 4404
INTRRX
Interrupt Register for RX Endpoints 1 to 4
0x01C6 4406
INTRTXE
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRTX
Core Registers
0x01C6 4408
INTRRXE
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRRX
0x01C6 440A
INTRUSB
Interrupt Register for Common USB Interrupts
0x01C6 440B
INTRUSBE
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRUSB
0x01C6 440C
FRAME
Frame Number Register
0x01C6 440E
INDEX
Index register for selecting the endpoint status and control registers
0x01C6 440F
TESTMODE
Register to enable the USB 2.0 test modes
0x01C6 4410
TXMAXP
Maximum packet size for peripheral/host TX endpoint (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4 only)
PERI_CSR0
Control Status register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral mode. (Index register set to
select Endpoint 0)
HOST_CSR0
Control Status register for Endpoint 0 in Host mode. (Index register set to select
Endpoint 0)
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status register for peripheral TX endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4)
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status register for host TX endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4)
RXMAXP
Maximum packet size for peripheral/host RX endpoint (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4 only)
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status register for peripheral RX endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4)
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status register for host RX endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4)
COUNT0
Number of received bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO. (Index register set to select
Endpoint 0)
RXCOUNT
Number of bytes in host RX endpoint FIFO. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4)
0x01C6 441A
HOST_TYPE0
Defines the speed of Endpoint 0
0x01C6 441A
HOST_TXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host TX endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1 - 4 only)
0x01C6 441B
HOST_NAKLIMIT0
Sets the NAK response timeout on Endpoint 0. (Index register set to select
Endpoint 0)
0x01C6 441B
HOST_TXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host TX endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4 only)
0x01C6 441C
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host RX endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1 - 4 only)
0x01C6 4412
0x01C6 4414
0x01C6 4416
0x01C6 4418
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
157
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions (continued)
Acronym
Register Description
0x01C6 441D
Address
HOST_RXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host RX endpoint. (Index register set to select
Endpoints 1 - 4 only)
0x01C6 441F
CONFIGDATA
Returns details of core configuration (Index register set to select Endpoint 0)
0x01C6 4420
FIFO0
TX and RX FIFO Register for Endpoint 0
0x01C6 4424
FIFO1
TX and RX FIFO Register for Endpoint 1
0x01C6 4428
FIFO2
TX and RX FIFO Register for Endpoint 2
0x01C6 442C
FIFO3
TX and RX FIFO Register for Endpoint 3
0x01C6 4430
FIFO4
TX and RX FIFO Register for Endpoint 4
0x01C6 4462
TXFIFOSZ
TX Endpoint FIFO Size (Index register set to select Endpoints 0 - 4 only)
0x01C6 4463
RXFIFOSZ
RX Endpoint FIFO Size (Index register set to select Endpoints 0 - 4 only)
0x01C6 4464
TXFIFOADDR
TX Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 0 - 4 only)
0x01C6 4466
RXFIFOADDR
RX Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 0 - 4 only)
Target Endpoint Control Registers (Valid Only in Host Mode) - EPTRG0
0x01C6 4480
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated TX
Endpoint
0x01C6 4482
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 4483
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint. This
is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high
speed hub
0x01C6 4484
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated RX
Endpoint
0x01C6 4486
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 4487
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
Target Endpoint Control Registers (Valid Only in Host Mode) - EPTRG1
0x01C6 4488
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated TX
Endpoint
0x01C6 448A
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 448B
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint. This
is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high
speed hub
0x01C6 448C
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated RX
Endpoint
0x01C6 448E
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 448F
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 4490
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated TX
Endpoint
0x01C6 4492
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 4493
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint. This
is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high
speed hub
Target Endpoint Control Registers (Valid Only in Host Mode) - EPTRG2
158
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions (continued)
Acronym
Register Description
0x01C6 4494
Address
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated RX
Endpoint
0x01C6 4496
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 4497
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
Target Endpoint Control Registers (Valid Only in Host Mode) - EPTRG3
0x01C6 4498
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated TX
Endpoint
0x01C6 449A
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 449B
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint. This
is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high
speed hub
0x01C6 449C
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated RX
Endpoint
0x01C6 449E
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 449F
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 44A0
TXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated TX
Endpoint
0x01C6 44A2
TXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 44A3
TXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated TX Endpoint. This
is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0 high
speed hub
0x01C6 44A4
RXFUNCADDR
Address of the target function that has to be accessed through the associated RX
Endpoint
0x01C6 44A6
RXHUBADDR
Address of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
0x01C6 44A7
RXHUBPORT
Port of the hub that has to be accessed through the associated RX Endpoint.
This is used only when full speed or low speed device is connected via a USB2.0
high speed hub
Target Endpoint Control Registers (Valid Only in Host Mode) - EPTRG4
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 0 - EOCSR0
0x01C6 4502
PERI_CSR0
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral mode
HOST_CSR0
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Host mode
0x01C6 4508
COUNT0
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO
0x01C6 450A
HOST_TYPE0
Defines the Speed of Endpoint 0
0x01C6 450B
HOST_NAKLIMIT0
Sets the NAK response timeout on Endpoint 0.
0x01C6 450F
CONFIGDATA
Returns details of core configuration
0x01C6 4510
TXMAXP
Maximum Packet size for Peripheral/Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4512
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral TX Endpoint
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host TX Endpoint
RXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host RX Endpoint
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 1 - EOCSR1
0x01C6 4514
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
159
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions (continued)
Address
0x01C6 4516
Acronym
Register Description
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral RX Endpoint
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host RX Endpoint
0x01C6 4518
RXCOUNT
Number of Bytes in Host RX Endpoint FIFO
0x01C6 451A
HOST_TXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 451B
HOST_TXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 451C
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host RX endpoint.
0x01C6 451D
HOST_RXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host RX endpoint.
0x01C6 4520
TXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4522
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral TX Endpoint
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4524
RXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host RX Endpoint
0x01C6 4526
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral RX Endpoint
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host RX Endpoint
0x01C6 4528
RXCOUNT
Number of Bytes in Host RX Endpoint FIFO
0x01C6 452A
HOST_TXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 452B
HOST_TXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 452C
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host RX endpoint.
0x01C6 452D
HOST_RXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host RX endpoint.
0x01C6 4530
TXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4532
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral TX Endpoint
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 2 - EOCSR2
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 3 - EOCSR3
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4534
RXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host RX Endpoint
0x01C6 4536
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral RX Endpoint
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host RX Endpoint
0x01C6 4538
RXCOUNT
Number of Bytes in Host RX Endpoint FIFO
0x01C6 453A
HOST_TXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 453B
HOST_TXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 453C
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host RX endpoint.
0x01C6 453D
HOST_RXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host RX endpoint.
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 4 - EOCSR4
0x01C6 4540
TXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4542
PERI_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral TX Endpoint
HOST_TXCSR
Control Status Register for Host TX Endpoint
0x01C6 4544
RXMAXP
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host RX Endpoint
0x01C6 4546
PERI_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Peripheral RX Endpoint
HOST_RXCSR
Control Status Register for Host RX Endpoint
RXCOUNT
Number of Bytes in Host RX Endpoint FIFO
0x01C6 4548
160
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-62. USB 2.0 Register Descriptions (continued)
Acronym
Register Description
0x01C6 454A
Address
HOST_TXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 454B
HOST_TXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host TX endpoint.
0x01C6 454C
HOST_RXTYPE
Sets the operating speed, transaction protocol and peripheral endpoint number
for the host RX endpoint.
0x01C6 454D
HOST_RXINTERVAL
Sets the polling interval for Interrupt/ISOC transactions or the NAK response
timeout on Bulk transactions for host RX endpoint.
6.14.3 USB2.0 Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-63. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB2.0 (see
Figure 6-41)
-270
NO.
1
tr(D)
Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals (1)
(1)
FULL SPEED
12 Mbps
HIGH SPEED
480 Mbps
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
75
300
4
20
0.5
UNIT
MAX
ns
2
tf(D)
Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals
75
300
4
20
0.5
3
trfM
Rise/Fall time, matching (2)
80
125
90
111.11
–
–
4
VCRS
Output signal cross-over voltage (1)
1.3
2
1.3
2
–
–
5
6
tjr(source)NT
Source (Host) Driver jitter, next transition
tjr(FUNC)NT
Function Driver jitter, next transition
tjr(source)PT
Source (Host) Driver jitter, paired transition (4)
tjr(FUNC)PT
Function Driver jitter, paired transition
7
tw(EOPT)
Pulse duration, EOP transmitter
8
tw(EOPR)
Pulse duration, EOP receiver
9
t(DRATE)
Data Rate
10
ZDRV
Driver Output Resistance
11
USB_R1
USB reference resistor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
LOW SPEED
1.5 Mbps
PARAMETER
%
V
(3)
2
2
25
2
(3)
ns
1
1
(3)
ns
1
(3)
ns
–
ns
10
1250
ns
1500
670
160
175
82
ns
–
–
1.5
12
ns
480 Mb/s
–
–
28
49.5
40.5
49.5
Ω
9.9
10.1
9.9
10.1
9.9
10.1
kΩ
Low Speed: CL = 200 pF, Full Speed: CL = 50 pF, High Speed: CL = 50 pF
tRFM = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]
For more detailed information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0, Chapter 7. Electrical.
tjr = tpx(1) - tpx(0)
USB_DM
VCRS
USB_DP
tper − tjr
90% VOH
10% VOL
tr
tf
Figure 6-41. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
161
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
USB
USB_VSSREF
USB_R1
10 K Ω ±1%
(A)
A. Place the 10 K Ω ± 1% as close to the device as possible.
Figure 6-42. USB Reference Resistor Routing
162
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.15
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
DM357 has 3 UART peripherals. Each UART has the following features:
• 16-byte storage space for both the transmitter and receiver FIFOs
• 1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA
• DMA signaling capability for both received and transmitted data
• Programmable auto-rts and auto-cts for autoflow control
• Frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65,535 to generate appropriate baud rates
• Prioritized interrupts
• Programmable serial data formats
– 5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters
– Even, odd, or no parity bit generation and detection
– 1, 1.5, or 2 stop bit generation
• False start bit detection
• Line break generation and detection
• Internal diagnostic capabilities
– Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation
– Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation
• Modem control functions (CTS, RTS) on UART2 only.
The UART0/1/2 registers are listed in Table 6-64, Table 6-65, and Table 6-66.
6.15.1 UART Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-64. UART0 Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C2 0000
RBR
UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (Read Only)
0x01C2 0000
THR
UART0 Transmitter Holding Register (Write Only)
0x01C2 0004
IER
UART0 Interrupt Enable Register
0x01C2 0008
IIR
UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (Read Only)
0x01C2 0008
FCR
UART0 FIFO Control Register (Write Only)
0x01C2 000C
LCR
UART0 Line Control Register
0x01C2 0010
MCR
UART0 Modem Control Register
0x01C2 0014
LSR
UART0 Line Status Register
0x01C2 0018
-
Reserved
0x01C2 001C
-
Reserved
0x01C2 0020
DLL
UART0 Divisor Latch (LSB)
0x01C2 0024
DLH
UART0 Divisor Latch (MSB)
0x01C2 0028
PID1
Peripheral Identification Register 1
0x01C2 002C
PID2
Peripheral Identification Register 2
0x01C2 0030
PWREMU_MGMT
UART0 Power and Emulation Management Register
0x01C2 0034 - 0x01C2 03FF
-
Reserved
Table 6-65. UART1 Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C2 0400
RBR
UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (Read Only)
0x01C2 0400
THR
UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (Write Only)
0x01C2 0404
IER
UART1 Interrupt Enable Register
0x01C2 0408
IIR
UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (Read Only)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
163
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-65. UART1 Register Descriptions (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C2 0408
FCR
UART1 FIFO Control Register (Write Only)
0x01C2 040C
LCR
UART1 Line Control Register
0x01C2 0410
MCR
UART1 Modem Control Register
0x01C2 0414
LSR
UART1 Line Status Register
0x01C2 0418
-
Reserved
0x01C2 041C
-
Reserved
0x01C2 0420
DLL
UART1 Divisor Latch (LSB)
0x01C2 0424
DLH
UART1 Divisor Latch (MSB)
0x01C2 0428
PID1
Peripheral Identification Register 1
0x01C2 042C
PID2
Peripheral Identification Register 2
0x01C2 0430
PWREMU_MGMT
UART1 Power and Emulation Management Register
0x01C2 0434 - 0x01C2 07FF
-
Reserved
Table 6-66. UART2 Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C2 0800
RBR
UART2 Receiver Buffer Register (Read Only)
0x01C2 0800
THR
UART2 Transmitter Holding Register (Write Only)
0x01C2 0804
IER
UART2 Interrupt Enable Register
0x01C2 0808
IIR
UART2 Interrupt Identification Register (Read Only)
0x01C2 0808
FCR
UART2 FIFO Control Register (Write Only)
0x01C2 080C
LCR
UART2 Line Control Register
0x01C2 0810
MCR
UART2 Modem Control Register
0x01C2 0814
LSR
UART2 Line Status Register
0x01C2 0818
-
Reserved
0x01C2 081C
-
Reserved
0x01C2 0820
DLL
UART2 Divisor Latch (LSB)
0x01C2 0824
DLH
UART2 Divisor Latch (MSB)
0x01C2 0828
PID1
Peripheral Identification Register 1
0x01C2 082C
PID2
Peripheral Identification Register 2
0x01C2 0830
PWREMU_MGMT
UART2 Power and Emulation Management Register
0x01C2 0834 - 0x01C2 0BFF
-
Reserved
164
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.15.2 UART Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-67. Timing Requirements for UARTx Receive (1) (see Figure 6-43)
-270
NO.
(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
4
tw(URXDB)
Pulse duration, receive data bit (RXDn) [15/30/100 pF]
0.96U
1.05U
ns
5
tw(URXSB)
Pulse duration, receive start bit [15/30/100 pF]
0.96U
1.05U
ns
U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
Table 6-68. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UARTx Transmit (1)
(see Figure 6-43)
NO.
(1)
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
128
UNIT
1
f(baud)
Maximum programmable baud rate
kHz
2
tw(UTXDB)
Pulse duration, transmit data bit (TXDn) [15/30/100 pF]
U-2
U+2
ns
3
tw(UTXSB)
Pulse duration, transmit start bit [15/30/100 pF]
U-2
U+2
ns
U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
3
2
UART_TXDn
Start
Bit
Data Bits
5
4
UART_RXDn
Start
Bit
Data Bits
Figure 6-43. UART Transmit/Receive Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
165
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.16
www.ti.com
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
The DM357 SPI peripheral provides a programmable length shift register which allows serial
communication with other SPI devices through a 3 or 4 wire interface. The SPI supports the following
features:
• Master mode operation
• 2 chip selects for interfacing to multiple slave SPI devices.
• 3 or 4 wire interface
The SPI registers are shown in Table 6-69.
6.16.1 SPI Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-69. SPI Register Descriptions
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0x01C6 6800
SPIGCR0
SPI Global Control Register 0
0x01C6 6804
SPIGCR1
SPI Global Control Register 1
0x01C6 6808
SPIINT
SPI Interrupt Register
0x01C6 680C
SPILVL
SPI Interrupt Level Register
0x01C6 6810
SPIFLG
SPI Flag Status Register
0x01C6 6814
SPIPC0
SPI Pin Control Register 0
0x01C6 6818
–
Reserved
0x01C6 681C
SPIPC2
SPI Pin Control Register 2
0x01C6 6820 - 0x01C6 6838
–
Reserved
0x01C6 683C
SPIDAT1
SPI Shift Register 1
0x01C6 6840
SPIBUF
SPI Buffer Register
0x01C6 6844
SPIEMU
SPI Emulation Register
0x01C6 6848
SPIDELAY
SPI Delay Register
0x01C6 684C
SPIDEF
SPI Default Chip Select Register
0x01C6 6850
SPIFMT0
SPI Data Format Register 0
0x01C6 6854
SPIFMT1
SPI Data Format Register 1
0x01C6 6858
SPIFMT2
SPI Data Format Register 2
0x01C6 685C
SPIFMT3
SPI Data Format Register 3
0x01C6 6860
INTVEC0
SPI Interrupt Vector Register 0
0x01C6 6864
INTVEC1
SPI Interrupt Vector Register 1
0x01C6 6868 - 0x01C6 6FFF
Reserved
6.16.2 SPI Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-70. Timing Requirements for SPI (All Modes) (1) (see Figure 6-44)
-270
NO.
(1)
166
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, SPI_CLK
33.33
56888.89
ns
2
tw(CLKH)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high (All Master Modes)
0.45*T
0.55*T
ns
3
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low (All Master Modes
0.45*T
0.55*T
ns
T = tc(CLK) [SPI_CLK period is equal to the SPI module clock divided by a configurable divider.]
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
1
2
3
SPIx_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 0)
SPIx_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 1)
Figure 6-44. SPI_CLK Timing
6.16.2.1 SPI Master Mode Timings (Clock Phase = 0)
Table 6-71. Timing Requirements for SPI Master Mode [Clock Phase = 0]
(see Figure 6-45)
-270
NO.
(1)
(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
4
tsu(DIV-CLKL)
Setup time, SPI_DI (input) valid before SPI_CLK (output)
falling edge
Clock Polarity = 0
0.5P + 9.4
ns
5
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
Setup time, SPI_DI (in put) valid before SPI_CLK (output)
rising edge
Clock Polarity = 1
0.5P + 9.4
ns
6
th(CLKL-DIV)
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) falling
Clock Polarity = 0
edge
0.5P - 4.5
ns
7
th(CLKH-DIV)
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) rising
edge
0.5P - 4.5
ns
Clock Polarity = 1
P = Period of the SPI module clock in nanoseconds (SYSCLK5).
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
167
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-72. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Master Mode
[Clock Phase = 0] (see Figure 6-45)
NO.
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
8
td(CLKH-DOV)
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
Clock Polarity = 0
-4
5
ns
9
td(CLKL-DOV)
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
Clock Polarity = 1
-4
5
ns
10
td(ENL-CLKH/L)
Delay time, SPI_EN[1:0] (output) falling edge to first SPI_CLK (output) rising or
falling edge (1) (2)
11
td(CLKH/L-ENH)
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling edge to SPI_EN[1:0] (output)
rising edge (1) (2) (3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
2P - 2.3
ns
1P + 0.5C - 0.2
ns
P = Period of the SPI module clock in nanoseconds (SYSCLK5).
This delay can be increased under software control by the C2TDELAY register bit field in the SPIDELAY register.
C = Period of SPI_CLK signal in ns.
11
SPI_EN
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 0)
10
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 1)
7
6
4
5
SPI_DI
(Input)
MSB IN
8
SPI_DO
(Output)
DATA
LSB IN
9
MSB OUT
DATA
LSB OUT
Figure 6-45. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)
6.16.2.2 SPI Master Mode Timings (Clock Phase = 1)
Table 6-73. Timing Requirements for SPI Master Mode [Clock Phase = 1] (1) (see Figure 6-46)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
13
tsu(DIV-CLKL)
Setup time, SPI_DI (input) valid before SPI_CLK
(output) rising edge
Clock Polarity = 0
0.5P + 9.4
ns
14
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
Setup time, SPI_DI (in put) valid before SPI_CLK
(output) falling edge
Clock Polarity = 1
0.5P + 9.4
ns
15
th(CLKL-DIV)
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output)
rising edge
Clock Polarity = 0
0.5P - 4.5
ns
16
th(CLKH-DIV)
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output)
falling edge
Clock Polarity = 1
0.5P - 4.5
ns
(1)
168
P = Period of the SPI module clock in nanoseconds (SYSCLK5).
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-74. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Master Mode
[Clock Phase = 1] (see Figure 6-46)
NO.
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
17
td(CLKL-DOV)
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
Clock Polarity = 0
-4
5
ns
18
td(CLKH-DOV)
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
Clock Polarity = 1
-4
5
ns
19
td(ENL-CLKH/L)
Delay time, SPI_EN[1:0] (output) falling edge to first SPI_CLK (output) rising or
falling edge (1) (2) (3)
20
td(CLKH/L-ENH)
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling edge to SPI_EN[1:0] (output)
rising edge (1) (2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
2P + 0.5C - 2.3
ns
1P - 0.2
ns
P = Period of the SPI module clock in nanoseconds (SYSCLK5).
This delay can be increased under software control by the C2TDELAY register bit field in the SPIDELAY register.
C = Period of SPI_CLK signal in ns.
20
SPI_EN
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 0)
19
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 1)
15
13
SPI_DI
(Input)
16
14
MSB IN
DATA
18
17
SPI_DO
(Output)
MSB OUT
LSB IN
DATA
LSB OUT
Figure 6-46. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
169
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.17 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between DM357 and other devices
compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus™) specification version 2.1. External
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive up to 8-bit data to/from the device
through the I2C module. The I2C port does not support CBUS compatible devices.
The I2C port supports:
• Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
• Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
• Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less
• Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
• Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
• Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling
• Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers
For more detailed information on the I2C peripheral, see the TMS320DM357 DMSoC Peripherals
Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG27).
CAUTION
The DM357 I2C pins use a standard ±4-mA LVCMOS buffer, not the slow I/O buffer
defined in the I2C specification. Series resistors may be necessary to reduce noise at
the system level.
170
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.17.1
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
I2C Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-75. I2C Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x1c2 1000
ICOAR
I2C Own Address Register
REGISTER NAME
0x1c2 1004
ICIMR
I2C Interrupt Mask Register
0x1c2 1008
ICSTR
I2C Interrupt Status Register
0x1c2 100C
ICCLKL
I2C Clock Divider Low Register
0x1c2 1010
ICCLKH
I2C Clock Divider High Register
0x1c2 1014
ICCNT
I2C Data Count Register
0x1c2 1018
ICDRR
I2C Data Receive Register
0x1c2 101C
ICSAR
I2C Slave Address Register
0x1c2 1020
ICDXR
I2C Data Transmit Register
0x1c2 1024
ICMDR
I2C Mode Register
0x1c2 1028
ICIVR
I2C Interrupt Vector Register
0x1c2 102C
ICEMDR
I2C Extended Mode Register
0x1c2 1030
ICPSC
I2C Prescaler Register
0x1c2 1034
ICPID1
I2C Peripheral Identification Register 1
0x1c2 1038
ICPID2
I2C Peripheral Identification Register 2
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
171
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.17.2
www.ti.com
I2C Electrical Data/Timing
6.17.2.1
Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing
Table 6-76. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 6-47)
-270
STANDARD
MODE
NO.
MIN
1
FAST MODE
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
2
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
3
th(SCLL-SDAL)
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
4
0.6
µs
4
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
5
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
(2)
6
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
250
7
th(SDA-SCLL)
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low
0 (3)
0 (3)
8
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
4.7
1.3
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000
20 + 0.1Cb (5)
300
ns
10
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
1000
20 + 0.1Cb (5)
300
ns
11
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
300
20 + 0.1Cb (5)
300
ns
300
(5)
300
12
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
13
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
14
tw(SP)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
15
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Cb
100
20 + 0.1Cb
4
ns
0.9 (4)
µs
0.6
ns
µs
0
Capacitive load for each bus line
µs
400
50
ns
400
pF
The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered
down.
A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then be
met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
11
9
SDA
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
SCL
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 6-47. I2C Receive Timings
172
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-77. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings (see Figure 6-48)
-270
NO.
STANDARD
MODE
PARAMETER
MIN
16
MAX
FAST MODE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
17
td(SCLH-SDAL)
Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
4.7
0.6
µs
18
td(SDAL-SCLL)
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
4
0.6
µs
19
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
1.3
µs
20
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
4
0.6
µs
21
td(SDAV-SCLH)
Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high
250
100
22
tv(SCLL-SDAV)
Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low
0
0
23
tw(SDAH)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
4.7
1.3
µs
28
td(SCLH-SDAH)
Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)
4
0.6
µs
29
Cp
Capacitance for each I2C pin
ns
0.9
10
10
µs
pF
SDA
21
23
19
28
20
SCL
16
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 6-48. I2C Transmit Timings
CAUTION
The DM357 I2C pins use a standard ±4-mA LVCMOS buffer, not the slow I/O buffer
defined in the I2C specification. Series resistors may be necessary to reduce noise at
the system level.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
173
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.18 Audio Serial Port (ASP)
The ASP provides these functions:
• Full-duplex communication
• Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream
• Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit
• Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially
connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices
• External shift clock or an internal, programmable frequency shift clock for data transfer
For more detailed information on the ASP peripheral, see the Documentation Support section for the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Audio Serial Port (ASP) Reference Guide (literature number SPRUG35).
6.18.1
ASP Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-78. ASP Register Descriptions
174
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01E0 2000
DRR
ASP Data Receive Register
REGISTER NAME
0x01E0 2004
DXR
ASP Data Transmit Register
0x01E0 2008
SPCR
ASP Serial Port Control Register
0x01E0 200C
RCR
ASP Receive Control Register
0x01E0 2010
XCR
ASP Transmit Control Register
0x01E0 2014
SRGR
0x01E0 2024
PCR
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
ASP Sample Rate Generator Register
ASP Pin Control Register
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.18.2
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
ASP Electrical Data/Timing
6.18.2.1
Audio Serial Port (ASP) Timing
Table 6-79. Timing Requirements for ASP (1) (see Figure 6-49)
-270
NO.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
38.5 or 2P (2) (3)
ns
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
19.25 or P (2) (3) (4)
ns
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKR int
11.8
CLKR ext
1.3
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
10.7
CLKR ext
0.9
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
3.1
CLKX int
12.2
CLKX ext
1.4
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
P = 1/SYSCLK5 clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 540 MHz, use P = 11.11 ns.
Use whichever value is greater.
The ASP does not require a duty cycle specification, just ensure the minimum pulse duration specification is met.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
175
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-80. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for ASP (1) (2)
(see Figure 6-49)
NO.
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
38.5 (3)
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
C - 1 (4)
C + 1 (4)
ns
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int
-2.1
3
ns
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
CLKX int
-1.7
3
CLKX ext
1.7
14.4
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data
bit from CLKX high
CLKX int
-3.9
4
CLKX ext
2.1
13
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
CLKX int
-3.9 + D1 (5)
4 + D2 (5)
ns
(5)
14.5 + D2 (5)
ns
FSX int
-2.3 + D1 (6)
4 + D2 (6)
td(FXH-DXV)
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
1.9 + D1 (6)
12.1 + D2 (6)
14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
176
CLKX ext
2.1 + D1
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency [SYSCLK1])
S = sample rate generator input clock = Not Supported if CLKSM = 0 (no CLKS pin on DM357)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the ASP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit [see footnote (3) above].
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
7
8
Bit(n-1)
DR
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
3
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX
(XDATDLY=00b)
12
DX
Bit 0
14
13(A)
Bit(n-1)
13(A)
(n-2)
(n-3)
A. Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bit only when XDATDLY ≠ 0.
Figure 6-49. ASP Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
177
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.19 Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)
The Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) provides an efficient interface between DM357 and the
network. The DM357 EMAC support both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX, or 10 Mbits/second (Mbps) and 100
Mbps in either half- or full-duplex mode, with hardware flow control and quality of service (QOS) support.
The EMAC controls the flow of packet data from the DM357 device to the PHY. The MDIO module
controls PHY configuration and status monitoring.
Both the EMAC and the MDIO modules interface to the DM357 device through a custom interface that
allows efficient data transmission and reception. This custom interface is referred to as the EMAC control
module, and is considered integral to the EMAC/MDIO peripheral. The control module is also used to
multiplex and control interrupts.
For the DM357 Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)/Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Module
Reference Guide which describes the DM357 EMAC peripheral in detail, see the Documentation Support
section for the TMS320DM357 DMSoC Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)/Management Data
Input/'Output (MDIO) Module User's Guide (literature number SPRUG36). For a list of supported registers
and register fields, see Table 6-81 [Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers] and Table 6-82 [EMAC
Statistics Registers] in this data manual.
6.19.1
EMAC Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-81. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers
178
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0000
TXIDVER
REGISTER NAME
01C8 0004
TXCONTROL
01C8 0008
TXTEARDOWN
01C8 0010
RXIDVER
01C8 0014
RXCONTROL
01C8 0018
RXTEARDOWN
Receive Teardown Register
01C8 0080
TXINTSTATRAW
Transmit Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
01C8 0084
TXINTSTATMASKED
01C8 0088
TXINTMASKSET
01C8 008C
TXINTMASKCLEAR
01C8 0090
MACINVECTOR
MAC Input Vector Register
01C8 00A0
RXINTSTATRAW
Receive Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
01C8 00A4
RXINTSTATMASKED
01C8 00A8
RXINTMASKSET
01C8 00AC
RXINTMASKCLEAR
Receive Interrupt Mask Clear Register
01C8 00B0
MACINTSTATRAW
MAC Interrupt Status (Unmasked) Register
01C8 00B4
MACINTSTATMASKED
01C8 00B8
MACINTMASKSET
01C8 00BC
MACINTMASKCLEAR
Transmit Identification and Version Register
Transmit Control Register
Transmit Teardown Register
Receive Identification and Version Register
Receive Control Register
Transmit Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
Transmit Interrupt Mask Set Register
Transmit Interrupt Mask Clear Register
Receive Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
Receive Interrupt Mask Set Register
MAC Interrupt Status (Masked) Register
MAC Interrupt Mask Set Register
MAC Interrupt Mask Clear Register
01C8 0100
RXMBPENABLE
Receive Multicast/Broadcast/Promiscuous Channel Enable Register
01C8 0104
RXUNICASTSET
Receive Unicast Enable Set Register
01C8 0108
RXUNICASTCLEAR
Receive Unicast Clear Register
01C8 010C
RXMAXLEN
01C8 0110
RXBUFFEROFFSET
01C8 0114
RXFILTERLOWTHRESH
Receive Filter Low Priority Frame Threshold Register
01C8 0120
RX0FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 0 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0124
RX1FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 1 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0128
RX2FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 2 Flow Control Threshold Register
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Receive Maximum Length Register
Receive Buffer Offset Register
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-81. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers (continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 012C
RX3FLOWTHRESH
REGISTER NAME
Receive Channel 3 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0130
RX4FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 4 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0134
RX5FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 5 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0138
RX6FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 6 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 013C
RX7FLOWTHRESH
Receive Channel 7 Flow Control Threshold Register
01C8 0140
RX0FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 0 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0144
RX1FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 1 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0148
RX2FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 2 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 014C
RX3FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 3 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0150
RX4FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 4 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0154
RX5FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 5 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0158
RX6FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 6 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 015C
RX7FREEBUFFER
Receive Channel 7 Free Buffer Count Register
01C8 0160
MACCONTROL
MAC Control Register
01C8 0164
MACSTATUS
MAC Status Register
Emulation Control Register
01C8 0168
EMCONTROL
01C8 016C
FIFOCONTROL
01C8 0170
MACCONFIG
MAC Configuration Register
01C8 0174
SOFTRESET
Soft Reset Register
01C8 01D0
MACSRCADDRLO
MAC Source Address Low Bytes Register (Lower 16-bits)
01C8 01D4
MACSRCADDRHI
MAC Source Address High Bytes Register (Upper 32-bits)
01C8 01D8
MACHASH1
MAC Hash Address Register 1
01C8 01DC
MACHASH2
MAC Hash Address Register 2
01C8 01E0
BOFFTEST
Back Off Test Register
01C8 01E4
TPACETEST
FIFO Control Register (Transmit and Receive)
Transmit Pacing Algorithm Test Register
01C8 01E8
RXPAUSE
Receive Pause Timer Register
01C8 01EC
TXPAUSE
Transmit Pause Timer Register
01C8 0200 - 01C8 02FC
(see Table 6-82)
01C8 0500
MACADDRLO
MAC Address Low Bytes Register
01C8 0504
MACADDRHI
MAC Address High Bytes Register
01C8 0508
MACINDEX
01C8 0600
TX0HDP
Transmit Channel 0 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0604
TX1HDP
Transmit Channel 1 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0608
TX2HDP
Transmit Channel 2 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 060C
TX3HDP
Transmit Channel 3 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0610
TX4HDP
Transmit Channel 4 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0614
TX5HDP
Transmit Channel 5 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0618
TX6HDP
Transmit Channel 6 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 061C
TX7HDP
Transmit Channel 7 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0620
RX0HDP
Receive Channel 0 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0624
RX1HDP
Receive Channel 1 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0628
RX2HDP
Receive Channel 2 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 062C
RX3HDP
Receive Channel 3 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0630
RX4HDP
Receive Channel 4 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0634
RX5HDP
Receive Channel 5 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 0638
RX6HDP
Receive Channel 6 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
01C8 063C
RX7HDP
Receive Channel 7 DMA Head Descriptor Pointer Register
Submit Documentation Feedback
EMAC Statistics Registers
MAC Index Register
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
179
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-81. Ethernet MAC (EMAC) Control Registers (continued)
180
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0640
TX0CP
Transmit Channel 0 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0644
TX1CP
Transmit Channel 1 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0648
TX2CP
Transmit Channel 2 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 064C
TX3CP
Transmit Channel 3 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0650
TX4CP
Transmit Channel 4 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0654
TX5CP
Transmit Channel 5 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0658
TX6CP
Transmit Channel 6 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 065C
TX7CP
Transmit Channel 7 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0660
RX0CP
Receive Channel 0 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0664
RX1CP
Receive Channel 1 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0668
RX2CP
Receive Channel 2 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 066C
RX3CP
Receive Channel 3 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0670
RX4CP
Receive Channel 4 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0674
RX5CP
Receive Channel 5 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 0678
RX6CP
Receive Channel 6 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
01C8 067C
RX7CP
Receive Channel 7 Completion Pointer (Interrupt Acknowledge)
Register
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
REGISTER NAME
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Table 6-82. EMAC Statistics Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01C8 0200
RXGOODFRAMES
REGISTER NAME
Good Receive Frames Register
01C8 0204
RXBCASTFRAMES
Broadcast Receive Frames Register
(Total number of good broadcast frames received)
01C8 0208
RXMCASTFRAMES
Multicast Receive Frames Register
(Total number of good multicast frames received)
01C8 020C
RXPAUSEFRAMES
Pause Receive Frames Register
01C8 0210
RXCRCERRORS
01C8 0214
RXALIGNCODEERRORS
01C8 0218
RXOVERSIZED
01C8 021C
RXJABBER
01C8 0220
RXUNDERSIZED
Receive Undersized Frames Register
(Total number of undersized frames received)
01C8 0224
RXFRAGMENTS
Receive Frame Fragments Register
01C8 0228
RXFILTERED
01C8 022C
RXQOSFILTERED
01C8 0230
RXOCTETS
01C8 0234
TXGOODFRAMES
Good Transmit Frames Register
(Total number of good frames transmitted)
Receive CRC Errors Register (Total number of frames received with
CRC errors)
Receive Alignment/Code Errors Register
(Total number of frames received with alignment/code errors)
Receive Oversized Frames Register
(Total number of oversized frames received)
Receive Jabber Frames Register
(Total number of jabber frames received)
Filtered Receive Frames Register
Received QOS Filtered Frames Register
Receive Octet Frames Register
(Total number of received bytes in good frames)
01C8 0238
TXBCASTFRAMES
Broadcast Transmit Frames Register
01C8 023C
TXMCASTFRAMES
Multicast Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0240
TXPAUSEFRAMES
Pause Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0244
TXDEFERRED
Deferred Transmit Frames Register
01C8 0248
TXCOLLISION
Transmit Collision Frames Register
01C8 024C
TXSINGLECOLL
01C8 0250
TXMULTICOLL
01C8 0254
TXEXCESSIVECOLL
01C8 0258
TXLATECOLL
01C8 025C
TXUNDERRUN
01C8 0260
TXCARRIERSENSE
01C8 0264
TXOCTETS
01C8 0268
FRAME64
Transmit Single Collision Frames Register
Transmit Multiple Collision Frames Register
Transmit Excessive Collision Frames Register
Transmit Late Collision Frames Register
Transmit Underrun Error Register
Transmit Carrier Sense Errors Register
Transmit Octet Frames Register
Transmit and Receive 64 Octet Frames Register
01C8 026C
FRAME65T127
Transmit and Receive 65 to 127 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0270
FRAME128T255
Transmit and Receive 128 to 255 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0274
FRAME256T511
Transmit and Receive 256 to 511 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0278
FRAME512T1023
Transmit and Receive 512 to 1023 Octet Frames Register
01C8 027C
FRAME1024TUP
Transmit and Receive 1024 to 1518 Octet Frames Register
01C8 0280
NETOCTETS
01C8 0284
RXSOFOVERRUNS
Receive FIFO or DMA Start of Frame Overruns Register
01C8 0288
RXMOFOVERRUNS
Receive FIFO or DMA Middle of Frame Overruns Register
01C8 028C
RXDMAOVERRUNS
Receive DMA Start of Frame and Middle of Frame Overruns
Register
Submit Documentation Feedback
Network Octet Frames Register
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
181
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-83. EMAC Control Module Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C8 1004
EWCTL
0x01C8 1008
EWINTTCNT
REGISTER NAME
Interrupt control register
Interrupt timer count
Table 6-84. EMAC Control Module RAM
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C8 2000 - 0x01C8 3FFF
182
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
REGISTER NAME
EMAC Control Module Descriptor Memory
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.19.2
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
EMAC Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-85. Timing Requirements for MRCLK (see Figure 6-50)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(MRCLK)
Cycle time, MRCLK
40
ns
2
tw(MRCLKH)
Pulse duration, MRCLK high
14
ns
3
tw(MRCLKL)
Pulse duration, MRCLK low
14
ns
1
2
3
MRCLK
Figure 6-50. MRCLK Timing (EMAC - Receive)
Table 6-86. Timing Requirements for MTCLK (see Figure 6-50)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(MTCLK)
Cycle time, MTCLK
40
ns
2
tw(MTCLKH)
Pulse duration, MTCLK high
14
ns
3
tw(MTCLKL)
Pulse duration, MTCLK low
14
ns
1
2
3
MTCLK
Figure 6-51. MTCLK Timing (EMAC - Transmit)
Table 6-87. Timing Requirements for EMAC MII Receive 10/100 Mbit/s (1) (see Figure 6-52)
-270
NO.
1
2
(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tsu(MRXD-MRCLKH)
Setup time, receive selected signals valid before MRCLK high
8
ns
th(MRCLKH-MRXD)
Hold time, receive selected signals valid after MRCLK high
8
ns
Receive selected signals include: MRXD3-MRXD0, MRXDV, and MRXER.
1
2
MRCLK (Input)
MRXD3−MRXD0,
MRXDV, MRXER (Inputs)
Figure 6-52. EMAC Receive Interface Timing
Table 6-88. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC MII Transmit
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
183
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-88. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMAC MII Transmit
10/100 Mbit/s (see Figure 6-53) (continued)
10/100 Mbit/s (1) (see Figure 6-53)
-270
NO.
1
(1)
td(MTCLKH-MTXD)
Delay time, MTCLK high to transmit selected signals valid
MIN
MAX
5
25
UNIT
ns
Transmit selected signals include: MTXD3-MTXD0, and MTXEN.
1
MTCLK (Input)
MTXD3−MTXD0,
MTXEN (Outputs)
Figure 6-53. EMAC Transmit Interface Timing
184
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.20 Management Data Input/Output (MDIO)
The Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) module continuously polls all 32 MDIO addresses in order to
enumerate all PHY devices in the system.
The Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) module implements the 802.3 serial management interface to
interrogate and control Ethernet PHY(s) using a shared two-wire bus. Host software uses the MDIO
module to configure the auto-negotiation parameters of each PHY attached to the EMAC, retrieve the
negotiation results, and configure required parameters in the EMAC module for correct operation. The
module is designed to allow almost transparent operation of the MDIO interface, with very little
maintenance from the core processor. Only one PHY may be connected at any given time.
For more detailed information on the MDIO peripheral, see the Documentation Support section for the
TMS320DM357 DMSoC Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC)/Management Data Input/'Output
(MDIO) Module User's Guide (literature number SPRUG36). For a list of supported registers and register
fields, see Table 6-89 [MDIO Registers] in this data manual.
6.20.1
Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-89. MDIO Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C8 4000
–
0x01C8 4004
CONTROL
0x01C8 4008
ALIVE
MDIO PHY Alive Status Register
0x01C8 400C
LINK
MDIO PHY Link Status Register
0x01C8 4010
LINKINTRAW
0x01C8 4014
LINKINTMASKED
0x01C8 4018
–
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
MDIO Control Register
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt (Unmasked) Register
MDIO Link Status Change Interrupt (Masked) Register
Reserved
0x01C8 4020
USERINTRAW
0x01C8 4024
USERINTMASKED
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt (Unmasked) Register
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt (Masked) Register
0x01C8 4028
USERINTMASKSET
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Set Register
0x01C8 402C
USERINTMASKCLEAR
MDIO User Command Complete Interrupt Mask Clear Register
0x01C8 4030 - 0x01C8 407C
–
0x01C8 4080
USERACCESS0
Reserved
MDIO User Access Register 0
0x01C8 4084
USERPHYSEL0
MDIO User PHY Select Register 0
0x01C8 4088
USERACCESS1
MDIO User Access Register 1
0x01C8 408C
USERPHYSEL1
MDIO User PHY Select Register 1
0x01C8 4090 - 0x01C8 47FF
–
Submit Documentation Feedback
Reserved
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
185
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.20.2
www.ti.com
Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-90. Timing Requirements for MDIO Input (see Figure 6-54 and Figure 6-55)
-270
NO.
MIN
1
tc(MDCLK)
Cycle time, MDCLK
400
2
tw(MDCLK)
Pulse duration, MDCLK high/low
180
3
tt(MDCLK)
Transition time, MDCLK
4
tsu(MDIO-MDCLKH)
Setup time, MDIO data input valid before MDCLK high
5
th(MDCLKH-MDIO)
Hold time, MDIO data input valid after MDCLK high
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
5
ns
15
ns
0
ns
1
3
3
MDCLK
4
5
MDIO
(input)
Figure 6-54. MDIO Input Timing
Table 6-91. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MDIO Output
(see Figure 6-55)
-270
NO.
7
td(MDCLKL-MDIO)
Delay time, MDCLK low to MDIO data output valid
MIN
MAX
-0.6
100
UNIT
ns
1
MDCLK
7
MDIO
(output)
Figure 6-55. MDIO Output Timing
186
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.21 Timer
The DM357 device has 3 64-bit general-purpose timers which have the following features:
• 64-bit count-up counter
• Timer modes:
– 64-bit general-purpose timer mode
– Dual 32-bit general-purpose timer mode (Timer 0 and 1)
– Watchdog timer mode (Timer 2)
• 2 possible clock sources:
– Internal clock
– External clock input via timer input pin TIM_IN (Timer 0 only)
• 2 operation modes:
– One-time operation (timer runs for one period then stops)
– Continuous operation (timer automatically resets after each period)
• Generates interrupts to the ARM CPU
• Generates sync event to EDMA
For more detailed information, see the TMS320DM357 DMSoC 64-Bit Timer User's Guide (literature
number SPRUG28).
6.21.1
Timer Peripheral Register Description(s)
Table 6-92. Timer 0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
DESCRIPTION
0x01C2 1400
-
0x01C2 1404
EMUMGT_CLKSPD
0x01C2 1410
TIM12
Timer 0 Counter Register 12
0x01C2 1414
TIM34
Timer 0 Counter Register 34
0x01C2 1418
PRD12
Timer 0 Period Register 12
0x01C2 141C
PRD34
Timer 0 Period Register 34
0x01C2 1420
TCR
0x01C2 1424
TGCR
0x01C2 1428 - 0x01C2 17FF
-
Reserved
Timer 0 Emulation Management/Clock Speed Register
Timer 0 Control Register
Timer 0 Global Control Register
Reserved
Table 6-93. Timer 1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C2 1800
-
0x01C2 1804
EMUMGT_CLKSPD
0x01C2 1810
TIM12
Timer 1 Counter Register 12
0x01C2 1814
TIM34
Timer 1 Counter Register 34
0x01C2 1818
PRD12
Timer 1 Period Register 12
0x01C2 181C
PRD34
Timer 1 Period Register 34
0x01C2 1820
TCR
0x01C2 1824
TGCR
0x01C2 1828 - 0x01C2 1BFF
-
Submit Documentation Feedback
DESCRIPTION
Reserved
Timer 1 Emulation Management/Clock Speed Register
Timer 1 Control Register
Timer 1 Global Control Register
Reserved
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
187
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-94. Timer 2 (Watchdog) Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C2 1C00
-
DESCRIPTION
0x01C2 1C04
EMUMGT_CLKSPD
0x01C2 1C10
TIM12
Timer 2 Counter Register 12
0x01C2 1C14
TIM34
Timer 2 Counter Register 34
Reserved
Timer 2 Emulation Management/Clock Speed Register
0x01C2 1C18
PRD12
Timer 2 Period Register 12
0x01C2 1C1C
PRD34
Timer 2 Period Register 34
0x01C2 1C20
TCR
0x01C2 1C24
TGCR
0x01C2 1C28
WDTCR
0x01C2 1C2C - 0x01C2 1FFF
-
6.21.2
Timer 2 Control Register
Timer 2 Global Control Register
Timer 2 Watchdog Timer Control Register
Reserved
Timer Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-95. Timing Requirements for Timer Input (1) (2) (see Figure 6-56)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
1
tc(TIN)
Cycle time, TIM_IN
2
tw(TINPH)
Pulse duration, TIM_IN high
0.45C
0.55C
ns
3
tw(TINPL)
Pulse duration, TIM_IN low
0.45C
0.55C
ns
4
tt(TIN)
Transition time, TIM_IN
0.05C
ns
(1)
(2)
4P
UNIT
ns
P = MXI/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI/CLKIN frequency is 27 MHz, use P = 37.037 ns.
C = TIM_IN cycle time in ns. For example, when TIM_IN frequency is 27 MHz, use C = 37.037 ns
1
2
4
3
4
TIM_IN
Figure 6-56. Timer Timing
188
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
6.22
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
The 3 DM357 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) peripherals support the following features:
• Period counter
• First-phase duration counter
• Repeat count for one-shot operation
• Configurable to operate in either one-shot or continuous mode
• Buffered period and first-phase duration registers
• One-shot operation triggerable by hardware events with programmable edge transitions. (low-to-high or
high-to-low).
• One-shot operation generates N+1 periods of waveform, N being the repeat count register value
• Emulation support
The register memory maps for PWM0/1/2 are shown in Table 6-96, Table 6-97, and Table 6-98.
Table 6-96. PWM0 Register Memory Map
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C2 2000
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
0x01C2 2004
PCR
PWM0 Peripheral Control Register
0x01C2 2008
CFG
PWM0 Configuration Register
0x01C2 200C
START
PWM0 Start Register
0x01C2 2010
RPT
PWM0 Repeat Count Register
0x01C2 2014
PER
PWM0 Period Register
0x01C2 2018
PH1D
PWM0 First-Phase Duration Register
0x01C2 201C - 0x01C2 23FF
-
Reserved
Table 6-97. PWM1 Register Memory Map
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C2 2400
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
0x01C2 2404
PCR
PWM1 Peripheral Control Register
0x01C2 2408
CFG
PWM1 Configuration Register
0x01C2 240C
START
PWM1 Start Register
0x01C2 2410
RPT
PWM1 Repeat Count Register
0x01C2 2414
PER
PWM1 Period Register
0x01C2 2418
PH1D
PWM1 First-Phase Duration Register
0x01C2 241C -0x01C2 27FF
-
Reserved
Table 6-98. PWM2 Register Memory Map
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C2 2800
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
0x01C2 2804
PCR
PWM2 Peripheral Control Register
0x01C2 2808
CFG
PWM2 Configuration Register
0x01C2 280C
START
PWM2 Start Register
0x01C2 2810
RPT
PWM2 Repeat Count Register
0x01C2 2814
PER
PWM2 Period Register
0x01C2 2818
PH1D
PWM2 First-Phase Duration Register
0x01C2 281C - 0x01C2 2BFF
-
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
189
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
6.22.1 PWM0/1/2 Electrical/Timing Data
Table 6-99. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PWM0/1/2 Outputs
(see Figure 6-57 and Figure 6-58)
NO.
-270
PARAMETER
MIN
1
tw(PWMH)
Pulse duration, PWMx high
37
2
tw(PWML)
Pulse duration, PWMx low
37
3
tt(PWM)
Transition time, PWMx
4
td(CCDC-PWMV)
Delay time, CCDC(VD) trigger event to PWMx valid
2
MAX
UNIT
ns
ns
5
ns
10
ns
1
2
PWM0/1/2
3
3
Figure 6-57. PWM Output Timing
VD(CCDC)
4
PWM0
INVALID
VALID
4
PWM1
INVALID
VALID
4
PWM2
INVALID
VALID
Figure 6-58. PWM Output Delay Timing
190
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
6.23 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
The JTAG (1) interface is used for BSDL testing and emulation of the DM357 device.
The DM357 device requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be properly
initialized. While RESET initializes the device, TRST initializes the device's emulation logic. Both resets
are required for proper operation.
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for
the device to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG
port interface and device's emulation logic in the reset state.
TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or
exercise the device's boundary scan functionality. Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by
TCK; otherwise, the boundary scan logic may not respond as expected after TRST is asserted.
RESET must be released only in order for boundary-scan JTAG to read the variant field of IDCODE
correctly. Other boundary-scan instructions work correctly independent of current state of RESET.
For maximum reliability, DM357 includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST
will always be asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic will always be properly
initialized.
JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG
controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST.
When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to initialize the device after powerup and externally
drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations.
6.23.1
(1)
JTAG Peripheral Register Description(s) – JTAG ID Register
IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
Table 6-100. JTAG ID Register
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0x01C4 0028
JTAGID
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Read-only. Provides 32-bit
JTAG ID of the device.
JTAG Identification Register
The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG/Device ID. For the
DM357 device, the JTAG ID register resides at address location 0x01C4 0028. The register hex value for
DM357 is: 0x1B70 002F for silicon revision 2.1. For the actual register bit names and their associated
bit field descriptions, see Figure 6-59 and Table 6-101.
31-28
27-12
11-1
0
VARIANT
(4-Bit)(A)
PART NUMBER (16-Bit)
MANUFACTURER (11-Bit)
LSB
R-000x
R-1011 0111 0000 0000
R-0000 0010 111
R-1
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset
(A) For silicon revisions 1.3 and earlier, VARIANT = 0000. For silicon revision 2.1, VARIANT = 0001.
Figure 6-59. JTAG ID Register Description - DM357 Register Value - 0xXB70 002F
Submit Documentation Feedback
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
191
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
www.ti.com
Table 6-101. JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT
NAME
31:28
VARIANT
Variant (4-Bit) value. DM357 value: 0001 for silicon revision 2.1.
27:12
PART NUMBER
Part Number (16-Bit) value. DM357 value: 1011 0111 0000 0000.
11-1
MANUFACTURER
0
LSB
6.23.2
DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer (11-Bit) value. DM357 value: 0000 0010 111.
LSB. This bit is read as a "1" for DM357.
JTAG Test-Port Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-102. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 6-60)
-270
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
1
tc(TCK)
Cycle time, TCK
20
ns
2
tw(TCKH)
Pulse duration, TCK high
8
ns
3
tw(TCKL)
Pulse duration, TCK low
8
ns
4
tc(RTCK)
Cycle time, RTCK
20
ns
5
tw(RTCKH)
Pulse duration, RTCK high
10
ns
6
tw(RTCKL)
Pulse duration, RTCK low
10
ns
7
tsu(TDIV-RTCKH)
Setup time, TDI/TMS valid before RTCK high
10
ns
8
th(RTCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TDI/TMS valid after RTCK high
1
ns
Table 6-103. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port
(see Figure 6-60)
NO.
9
-270
PARAMETER
td(RTCKL-TDOV)
MIN
Delay time, RTCK low to TDO valid
MAX
15
UNIT
ns
1
2
3
TCK
4
5
6
RTCK
9
TDO
8
7
TDI/TMS
Figure 6-60. JTAG Test-Port Timing
192
Peripheral and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
TMS320DM357
Digital Media System-on-Chip
www.ti.com
SPRS553 – NOVEMBER 2008
7 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA–ZWT mechanical
package.
7.1 Thermal Data for ZWT
Table 7-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [ZWT]
NO.
N/A
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
6.54
2
RΘJB
Junction-to-board
15.62
N/A
29.75
0.00
4
26.78
1.0
26.20
2.00
6
25.80
3.00
7
0.11
0.00
8
0.15
1.0
5
9
RΘJA
PsiJT
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-package top
0.16
2.00
10
0.16
3.00
11
14.79
0.00
12
13
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
14
(2)
AIR FLOW (m/s) (2)
1
3
(1)
C/W (1)
14.66
1.0
14.66
2.00
14.66
3.00
These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 1S2P system and will change based on environment as well as application.
For more information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards – EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment
Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air) and JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount
Packages.
m/s = meters per second
7.1.1 Packaging Information
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current data available for the
designated device(s). This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
193
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products
Amplifiers
Data Converters
DSP
Clocks and Timers
Interface
Logic
Power Mgmt
Microcontrollers
RFID
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions
amplifier.ti.com
dataconverter.ti.com
dsp.ti.com
www.ti.com/clocks
interface.ti.com
logic.ti.com
power.ti.com
microcontroller.ti.com
www.ti-rfid.com
www.ti.com/lprf
Applications
Audio
Automotive
Broadband
Digital Control
Medical
Military
Optical Networking
Security
Telephony
Video & Imaging
Wireless
www.ti.com/audio
www.ti.com/automotive
www.ti.com/broadband
www.ti.com/digitalcontrol
www.ti.com/medical
www.ti.com/military
www.ti.com/opticalnetwork
www.ti.com/security
www.ti.com/telephony
www.ti.com/video
www.ti.com/wireless
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2008, Texas Instruments Incorporated